39
Key Stage 4 Course Options 2013-2015 Honley High School Options Fair Thursday 31 January 2013 7.00 pm

NEW_OPTIONS_BOOKLET_2013_a4_Website

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

http://www.honleyhigh.co.uk/docs/NEW_OPTIONS_BOOKLET_2013_a4_Website.pdf

Citation preview

Key Stage 4 Course Options

2013-2015

Honley High School

Options Fair Thursday 31 January

2013 700 pm

CONTENTS

This booklet contains all the information you need to make your choices for Year 10 We hope you will find it useful It is divided into eight sections which will lead you through the main decisions ahead

A Introduction

B Option Subject

C How to decide - who will help you

D Careers Education Information Advice and Guidance

E Options Choices Form

F Frequently Asked Questions

G Key dates

H Course Outlines At the end of the booklet is the Option Choices Form which must be completed and returned to Student Services by Thursday 14th February 2013

CONTENTS

A The Curriculum at Key Stage 4

The National Curriculum states that all students must follow a core curriculum of bull GCSE English (Double Award) bull GCSE Mathematics bull GCSE Science (Dual Award) bull GCSE Religious Education bull PE (Physical Education) bull PSHCE (Personal Social Health and Citizenship Education) Core Physical Education is taken by all students in Years 10 and 11 but does NOT lead to a GCSE If you wish to take GCSE PE you must select it as one of your options

What are your choices In Key Stage 4 students must follow some subjects as part of the National Curriculum but can also choose subjects that they enjoy or may find useful in their future careers It is important that students take great care in the selection of their option choices and consider the full range of subjects available In addition to the core subjects the vast majority of students will take four optional subjects at GCSE This is a very important time for all Year 9 students when some difficult decisions have to be made This booklet describes the different courses which may be chosen in Year 10 along with information about the core subjects that all students will study during the next two years as part of the National Curriculum Even though the National Curriculum is less rigid than it was we still recommend that students do not specialise too early and so hope that students choose a range of courses across subject areas It is important for many students to have the opportunity to take a language and a humanities (history or geography) subject at GCSE This is because higher education establishments and increasingly employers look for a broader more academic core of subjects Achievement of the English Baccalaureate is a reflection of this academic core of subjects which comprises English mathematics two sciences a language and a humanities subject Whilst the English Baccalaureate is not compulsory for any students at Honley High School it is a combination of subjects that should be seriously considered by those thinking of higher education in the future Further information and useful websites are given in Section C of this booklet

INTRODUCTION

In order to help you make the right choices and for the right reasons read the information in this booklet carefully Once option courses have been allocated it is very difficult to make changes and your preferred subject may no longer be available due to timetable and group size restrictions

DO Read all the information about the choices available Attend the Options Fair on 31 January to discuss possible options and hear about the options

choice procedure Try to gain variety in your courses by looking carefully at the different skills and controlled

assessment demands involved in each of the 5 lists of subject choices Choose subjects which you enjoy you are good at and which may be useful to you in your future

career

DO NOT Choose a subject because you like the teacher (they may not teach GCSE next year) Choose a subject because your friend is choosing it They may well have different plans for the

future

B Option Subjects

GCSE subjects ndash each subject counts as one option You will need to take four of these subjects in addition to the core subjects Art and Design Business Studies Child Development Computing Dance Drama Food French Geography Graphic Products History ICT Media Studies Music PE Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

INTRODUCTION (continued)

Additional qualifications

In addition to the subjects offered at Honley High School a small number of students may be able to study an additional learning course through our links with other schools and colleges Places on these courses will be strictly limited and students will be required to go through a selection process You must choose one extra option if wanting a place on an additional learning course as these courses are taken in addition to the 4 option subjects in school Taking an additional learning course places extra demands upon the learnerrsquos time and commitment and this must be considered carefully when looking to take any of these courses Students will be expected to travel independently to and from the providing school or college and therefore there may be additional costs associated with studying the course At the time of publishing this booklet we have not received details about the courses that will be available from September 2013 but may include the following subjects Photography GCSE Animal Care BTEC Engineering NVQ Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC Please indicate on the options form if you wish to be informed about any of the additional learning courses when details are made available to the school

ADDITIONAL QUALIFICATIONS

C How to decide ndash who will help you

Do you remember the practical hints given at the beginning of this booklet and in your ldquoDirectionsrdquo book from Calderdale and Kirklees Careers If not look at them again Think carefully about the effect that your choices now will have on your future plans At your Guidance Interview you will have reflected on your strengths and have thought about the kind of subjects and qualifications that would affect future possible career ideas Donrsquot worry - help is at hand There are many people waiting to answer your questions or give you advice You have already got an Action Plan in your Individual Learning Plan which shows small steps you need to take to ensure you make an informed choice Your subject teachers ndash the experts who know most about the courses and your ability Your form tutor ndash who knows most about you and can point you in the right direction for advice PSHCE ndash careers programme using ldquoDirectionsrdquo booklet Careers Advisers ndash give advice about career opportunities and decision making Employers ndash who can give you advice about training and employment Your parentscarers ndash who know you best as a person Library resources ndash useful information in the careers library Computer resources ndash programs such as ldquoKudosrdquo and ldquoCareerscaperdquo on wwwcascaidcouk Calderdale and Kirklees Careers Service ndash wwwworkaboutorguk where you can order free career ideasjob information leaflets University websites ndash some students already have a very clear idea about what university and or degree course they may wish to study in the future In addition to individual university websites we recommend that you look at the following for information on helpful subject combinations at GCSE and A level wwwrussellgroupacuk - The Russell Group represents 24 leading UK universities and has advice about lsquofacilitatingrsquo subjects at GCSE which will be needed for entry into the top UK universities wwwucasacuk - Central organisation through which applications are processed for entry to both sixth form education and universities

HOW TO DECIDE ndash WHO WILL HELP YOU

D Careers Education and Guidance

During the autumn term of Year 9 you will have followed a planned programme of Careers Education and Guidance Within form groups during personal social health and citizenship education you will have some lessons in which to study a variety of topics that relate to subject choice these are as follows Making choices and decisions Self-awareness Subject options Qualifications awareness During these sessions you were given a copy of ldquoDirectionsrdquo which contains some useful information on choices subjects decisions courses exams and qualifications You will also have had ICT sessions during which you were introduced to Careers software such as Kudos and Careerscape this software can be accessed in school and on-line and will enable you to further develop ideas and plans for possible career pathways You may have made an Action Plan on Kudos to help you make an informed choice You will have had a 11 Guidance Interview with a member of staff who has offered you impartial informationadvice on qualifications and who has assisted in completing an action plan for you to try to ensure you make an informed choice Remember choosing the right career option can be difficult now is a good time to start to consider what opportunities are available

E Options Choices Form

At the back of this booklet is a Year 10 Choices Form clearly showing the choices available to you in Year 10 Please read the instructions on the form very carefully before you complete it When you have filled in your form please return it to Student Services by Thursday 14 February at the latest Once the option choices forms are collected the Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally problems may arise because of the numbers of students choosing particular subjects It is not possible to run some subjects when only a small number of students opt to take them other subjects can only accommodate limited numbers with existing facilities In the event of such problems the reserve choices will be considered as a possible option for individual students Once these decisions are made it can be difficult to change them which is why it is so important that you think carefully before you choose If you have any queries about the options process or the completion of the form please contact Mrs H Rogers Deputy Headteacher at the school

CAREERs INFORMATION and INDIVIDUAL CHOICES FORM

F Frequently Asked Questions

Can I do the same subjects as my friends Answer This is not a good basis for making your decision Your friends will have different ideas to you and may enjoy different types of subjects Choose subjects for yourself and try not to be influenced by your friends In any case you may choose the same subject as your friends and then find that you have been put into another group I like my teacher Can I be in hisher group next year Answer The teacher that you will be given will depend upon the choices you have made It is not possible to choose a teacher Choose a subject because you like the subject and think you can do well in it Will I get the subjects that I have chosen Answer We try our very best to give students the subject choices that they have requested Unfortunately in a small minority of cases it is not possible to give all choices due to the combination of subjects that you are wishing to do Please bear this in mind when choosing your reserve options Can I change my mind when I start the course in Year 10 Answer The short answer to this question is no We have spent a lot of time looking at the subjects we have offered you and provided you with guidance based on prior attainment and your own future aspirations Please make sure that you look carefully at the options that you are choosing and seek further advice now if you are in doubt

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

G YEAR 9 OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012-2013

Autumn Term 2012 Citizenship lessons on making choices amp careers

Individual 11 guidance interviews with a key member of staff

Monday 28 January 2013

Assembly Mrs Rogers to talk to Year 9 students about the option choices and procedures

Thursday 31 January 2013

Year 9 Options Fair Parents and students are invited to attend from 7pm to 830pm for a presentation about the Options

process and short presentations from subjects about the courses available at GCSE In addition there will be the opportunity to meet key staff

Thursday 14 February 2013

Deadline for return of individual choices forms

March 2013 ndash July 2013

Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally the reserve choices will need to be considered as a possible option for individual

students

Summer 2013

The school timetable for 2013-2014 is written

OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012 - 2013

H Course Outlines

CORE GCSE

SUBJECTS

ENGLISH GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE English requires a lot of creativity and effort but donrsquot let this put you off because the course is actually quite enjoyable and interesting Itrsquos not just about reading books and writing essays ndash you will do orals which can be quite easy (especially if yoursquore a drama student) You will also do work on spoken English and the media By the end of the course you will be able to understand poems that at first seemed to make no sense understand Shakespearian language and generally feel a lot cleverer

WHY STUDY ENGLISH Whether you continue your education after Year 11 or leave to seek employment English is the vital qualification which every employer requires and every institute of further or higher education demands Students with good grades in the subject have gone on to become doctors journalists scientists lawyers and even writers themselves The skills of appreciation learned in an English lesson arenrsquot however just limited to helping you obtain a good job Hopefully the enjoyment of a good play or book will stay with you and enhance the quality of the rest of your life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will follow an integrated programme of English involving Reading Writing Speaking and Listening leading to GCSE certification at Key Stage 4 of the National Curriculum The course involves the production of a file of work produced under controlled conditions and work completed under examination conditions Entry is available at Higher (Grades A to D) or Foundation (Grades C to G) Level For English Language you will produce three controlled conditions assignments an extended reading task based on a text you have read in class two pieces of creative writing and a spoken language study You will also be assessed in three Speaking and Listening activities A presentation taking part in a discussion and playing a role In addition you will sit an external examination lasting two hours fifteen minutes where you will complete a Reading section based on non fiction and a Writing section with two short writing tasks Most students will also be entered for English Literature which will assess your ability to respond to additional prose and poetry studied on the course You will produce one controlled conditions assignment comparing a play by Shakespeare with another text In addition you will sit two external examinations which will examine your response to other texts some of which will have already been studied on the English course

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn through a variety of learning and teaching styles familiar from Key Stage 3 including individual pair group and whole class discussion You will learn by developing the skills of note-making and preparing work under rigorous time constraints You will learn by using ICT and the media to support your own research

PROGRESSION Good GCSE grades in English could lead to the study of English Language or English Literature at Advanced level A minimum grade C is required in order to progress on to any form of further education

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT ENGLISH LANGUAGE ndash AQA 40 examination 40 written coursework - teacher assessed 20 oral coursework - teacher assessed ENGLISH LITERATURE ndash AQA 75 examination 25 written coursework -teacher assessed

For more information about studying English at GCSE see Mr Shaw

See the full English Language specification at httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLANGA-W-TRB-SPGPDF

English Literature httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLIT-W-TRB-SPGPDF

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

CONTENTS

This booklet contains all the information you need to make your choices for Year 10 We hope you will find it useful It is divided into eight sections which will lead you through the main decisions ahead

A Introduction

B Option Subject

C How to decide - who will help you

D Careers Education Information Advice and Guidance

E Options Choices Form

F Frequently Asked Questions

G Key dates

H Course Outlines At the end of the booklet is the Option Choices Form which must be completed and returned to Student Services by Thursday 14th February 2013

CONTENTS

A The Curriculum at Key Stage 4

The National Curriculum states that all students must follow a core curriculum of bull GCSE English (Double Award) bull GCSE Mathematics bull GCSE Science (Dual Award) bull GCSE Religious Education bull PE (Physical Education) bull PSHCE (Personal Social Health and Citizenship Education) Core Physical Education is taken by all students in Years 10 and 11 but does NOT lead to a GCSE If you wish to take GCSE PE you must select it as one of your options

What are your choices In Key Stage 4 students must follow some subjects as part of the National Curriculum but can also choose subjects that they enjoy or may find useful in their future careers It is important that students take great care in the selection of their option choices and consider the full range of subjects available In addition to the core subjects the vast majority of students will take four optional subjects at GCSE This is a very important time for all Year 9 students when some difficult decisions have to be made This booklet describes the different courses which may be chosen in Year 10 along with information about the core subjects that all students will study during the next two years as part of the National Curriculum Even though the National Curriculum is less rigid than it was we still recommend that students do not specialise too early and so hope that students choose a range of courses across subject areas It is important for many students to have the opportunity to take a language and a humanities (history or geography) subject at GCSE This is because higher education establishments and increasingly employers look for a broader more academic core of subjects Achievement of the English Baccalaureate is a reflection of this academic core of subjects which comprises English mathematics two sciences a language and a humanities subject Whilst the English Baccalaureate is not compulsory for any students at Honley High School it is a combination of subjects that should be seriously considered by those thinking of higher education in the future Further information and useful websites are given in Section C of this booklet

INTRODUCTION

In order to help you make the right choices and for the right reasons read the information in this booklet carefully Once option courses have been allocated it is very difficult to make changes and your preferred subject may no longer be available due to timetable and group size restrictions

DO Read all the information about the choices available Attend the Options Fair on 31 January to discuss possible options and hear about the options

choice procedure Try to gain variety in your courses by looking carefully at the different skills and controlled

assessment demands involved in each of the 5 lists of subject choices Choose subjects which you enjoy you are good at and which may be useful to you in your future

career

DO NOT Choose a subject because you like the teacher (they may not teach GCSE next year) Choose a subject because your friend is choosing it They may well have different plans for the

future

B Option Subjects

GCSE subjects ndash each subject counts as one option You will need to take four of these subjects in addition to the core subjects Art and Design Business Studies Child Development Computing Dance Drama Food French Geography Graphic Products History ICT Media Studies Music PE Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

INTRODUCTION (continued)

Additional qualifications

In addition to the subjects offered at Honley High School a small number of students may be able to study an additional learning course through our links with other schools and colleges Places on these courses will be strictly limited and students will be required to go through a selection process You must choose one extra option if wanting a place on an additional learning course as these courses are taken in addition to the 4 option subjects in school Taking an additional learning course places extra demands upon the learnerrsquos time and commitment and this must be considered carefully when looking to take any of these courses Students will be expected to travel independently to and from the providing school or college and therefore there may be additional costs associated with studying the course At the time of publishing this booklet we have not received details about the courses that will be available from September 2013 but may include the following subjects Photography GCSE Animal Care BTEC Engineering NVQ Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC Please indicate on the options form if you wish to be informed about any of the additional learning courses when details are made available to the school

ADDITIONAL QUALIFICATIONS

C How to decide ndash who will help you

Do you remember the practical hints given at the beginning of this booklet and in your ldquoDirectionsrdquo book from Calderdale and Kirklees Careers If not look at them again Think carefully about the effect that your choices now will have on your future plans At your Guidance Interview you will have reflected on your strengths and have thought about the kind of subjects and qualifications that would affect future possible career ideas Donrsquot worry - help is at hand There are many people waiting to answer your questions or give you advice You have already got an Action Plan in your Individual Learning Plan which shows small steps you need to take to ensure you make an informed choice Your subject teachers ndash the experts who know most about the courses and your ability Your form tutor ndash who knows most about you and can point you in the right direction for advice PSHCE ndash careers programme using ldquoDirectionsrdquo booklet Careers Advisers ndash give advice about career opportunities and decision making Employers ndash who can give you advice about training and employment Your parentscarers ndash who know you best as a person Library resources ndash useful information in the careers library Computer resources ndash programs such as ldquoKudosrdquo and ldquoCareerscaperdquo on wwwcascaidcouk Calderdale and Kirklees Careers Service ndash wwwworkaboutorguk where you can order free career ideasjob information leaflets University websites ndash some students already have a very clear idea about what university and or degree course they may wish to study in the future In addition to individual university websites we recommend that you look at the following for information on helpful subject combinations at GCSE and A level wwwrussellgroupacuk - The Russell Group represents 24 leading UK universities and has advice about lsquofacilitatingrsquo subjects at GCSE which will be needed for entry into the top UK universities wwwucasacuk - Central organisation through which applications are processed for entry to both sixth form education and universities

HOW TO DECIDE ndash WHO WILL HELP YOU

D Careers Education and Guidance

During the autumn term of Year 9 you will have followed a planned programme of Careers Education and Guidance Within form groups during personal social health and citizenship education you will have some lessons in which to study a variety of topics that relate to subject choice these are as follows Making choices and decisions Self-awareness Subject options Qualifications awareness During these sessions you were given a copy of ldquoDirectionsrdquo which contains some useful information on choices subjects decisions courses exams and qualifications You will also have had ICT sessions during which you were introduced to Careers software such as Kudos and Careerscape this software can be accessed in school and on-line and will enable you to further develop ideas and plans for possible career pathways You may have made an Action Plan on Kudos to help you make an informed choice You will have had a 11 Guidance Interview with a member of staff who has offered you impartial informationadvice on qualifications and who has assisted in completing an action plan for you to try to ensure you make an informed choice Remember choosing the right career option can be difficult now is a good time to start to consider what opportunities are available

E Options Choices Form

At the back of this booklet is a Year 10 Choices Form clearly showing the choices available to you in Year 10 Please read the instructions on the form very carefully before you complete it When you have filled in your form please return it to Student Services by Thursday 14 February at the latest Once the option choices forms are collected the Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally problems may arise because of the numbers of students choosing particular subjects It is not possible to run some subjects when only a small number of students opt to take them other subjects can only accommodate limited numbers with existing facilities In the event of such problems the reserve choices will be considered as a possible option for individual students Once these decisions are made it can be difficult to change them which is why it is so important that you think carefully before you choose If you have any queries about the options process or the completion of the form please contact Mrs H Rogers Deputy Headteacher at the school

CAREERs INFORMATION and INDIVIDUAL CHOICES FORM

F Frequently Asked Questions

Can I do the same subjects as my friends Answer This is not a good basis for making your decision Your friends will have different ideas to you and may enjoy different types of subjects Choose subjects for yourself and try not to be influenced by your friends In any case you may choose the same subject as your friends and then find that you have been put into another group I like my teacher Can I be in hisher group next year Answer The teacher that you will be given will depend upon the choices you have made It is not possible to choose a teacher Choose a subject because you like the subject and think you can do well in it Will I get the subjects that I have chosen Answer We try our very best to give students the subject choices that they have requested Unfortunately in a small minority of cases it is not possible to give all choices due to the combination of subjects that you are wishing to do Please bear this in mind when choosing your reserve options Can I change my mind when I start the course in Year 10 Answer The short answer to this question is no We have spent a lot of time looking at the subjects we have offered you and provided you with guidance based on prior attainment and your own future aspirations Please make sure that you look carefully at the options that you are choosing and seek further advice now if you are in doubt

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

G YEAR 9 OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012-2013

Autumn Term 2012 Citizenship lessons on making choices amp careers

Individual 11 guidance interviews with a key member of staff

Monday 28 January 2013

Assembly Mrs Rogers to talk to Year 9 students about the option choices and procedures

Thursday 31 January 2013

Year 9 Options Fair Parents and students are invited to attend from 7pm to 830pm for a presentation about the Options

process and short presentations from subjects about the courses available at GCSE In addition there will be the opportunity to meet key staff

Thursday 14 February 2013

Deadline for return of individual choices forms

March 2013 ndash July 2013

Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally the reserve choices will need to be considered as a possible option for individual

students

Summer 2013

The school timetable for 2013-2014 is written

OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012 - 2013

H Course Outlines

CORE GCSE

SUBJECTS

ENGLISH GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE English requires a lot of creativity and effort but donrsquot let this put you off because the course is actually quite enjoyable and interesting Itrsquos not just about reading books and writing essays ndash you will do orals which can be quite easy (especially if yoursquore a drama student) You will also do work on spoken English and the media By the end of the course you will be able to understand poems that at first seemed to make no sense understand Shakespearian language and generally feel a lot cleverer

WHY STUDY ENGLISH Whether you continue your education after Year 11 or leave to seek employment English is the vital qualification which every employer requires and every institute of further or higher education demands Students with good grades in the subject have gone on to become doctors journalists scientists lawyers and even writers themselves The skills of appreciation learned in an English lesson arenrsquot however just limited to helping you obtain a good job Hopefully the enjoyment of a good play or book will stay with you and enhance the quality of the rest of your life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will follow an integrated programme of English involving Reading Writing Speaking and Listening leading to GCSE certification at Key Stage 4 of the National Curriculum The course involves the production of a file of work produced under controlled conditions and work completed under examination conditions Entry is available at Higher (Grades A to D) or Foundation (Grades C to G) Level For English Language you will produce three controlled conditions assignments an extended reading task based on a text you have read in class two pieces of creative writing and a spoken language study You will also be assessed in three Speaking and Listening activities A presentation taking part in a discussion and playing a role In addition you will sit an external examination lasting two hours fifteen minutes where you will complete a Reading section based on non fiction and a Writing section with two short writing tasks Most students will also be entered for English Literature which will assess your ability to respond to additional prose and poetry studied on the course You will produce one controlled conditions assignment comparing a play by Shakespeare with another text In addition you will sit two external examinations which will examine your response to other texts some of which will have already been studied on the English course

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn through a variety of learning and teaching styles familiar from Key Stage 3 including individual pair group and whole class discussion You will learn by developing the skills of note-making and preparing work under rigorous time constraints You will learn by using ICT and the media to support your own research

PROGRESSION Good GCSE grades in English could lead to the study of English Language or English Literature at Advanced level A minimum grade C is required in order to progress on to any form of further education

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT ENGLISH LANGUAGE ndash AQA 40 examination 40 written coursework - teacher assessed 20 oral coursework - teacher assessed ENGLISH LITERATURE ndash AQA 75 examination 25 written coursework -teacher assessed

For more information about studying English at GCSE see Mr Shaw

See the full English Language specification at httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLANGA-W-TRB-SPGPDF

English Literature httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLIT-W-TRB-SPGPDF

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

A The Curriculum at Key Stage 4

The National Curriculum states that all students must follow a core curriculum of bull GCSE English (Double Award) bull GCSE Mathematics bull GCSE Science (Dual Award) bull GCSE Religious Education bull PE (Physical Education) bull PSHCE (Personal Social Health and Citizenship Education) Core Physical Education is taken by all students in Years 10 and 11 but does NOT lead to a GCSE If you wish to take GCSE PE you must select it as one of your options

What are your choices In Key Stage 4 students must follow some subjects as part of the National Curriculum but can also choose subjects that they enjoy or may find useful in their future careers It is important that students take great care in the selection of their option choices and consider the full range of subjects available In addition to the core subjects the vast majority of students will take four optional subjects at GCSE This is a very important time for all Year 9 students when some difficult decisions have to be made This booklet describes the different courses which may be chosen in Year 10 along with information about the core subjects that all students will study during the next two years as part of the National Curriculum Even though the National Curriculum is less rigid than it was we still recommend that students do not specialise too early and so hope that students choose a range of courses across subject areas It is important for many students to have the opportunity to take a language and a humanities (history or geography) subject at GCSE This is because higher education establishments and increasingly employers look for a broader more academic core of subjects Achievement of the English Baccalaureate is a reflection of this academic core of subjects which comprises English mathematics two sciences a language and a humanities subject Whilst the English Baccalaureate is not compulsory for any students at Honley High School it is a combination of subjects that should be seriously considered by those thinking of higher education in the future Further information and useful websites are given in Section C of this booklet

INTRODUCTION

In order to help you make the right choices and for the right reasons read the information in this booklet carefully Once option courses have been allocated it is very difficult to make changes and your preferred subject may no longer be available due to timetable and group size restrictions

DO Read all the information about the choices available Attend the Options Fair on 31 January to discuss possible options and hear about the options

choice procedure Try to gain variety in your courses by looking carefully at the different skills and controlled

assessment demands involved in each of the 5 lists of subject choices Choose subjects which you enjoy you are good at and which may be useful to you in your future

career

DO NOT Choose a subject because you like the teacher (they may not teach GCSE next year) Choose a subject because your friend is choosing it They may well have different plans for the

future

B Option Subjects

GCSE subjects ndash each subject counts as one option You will need to take four of these subjects in addition to the core subjects Art and Design Business Studies Child Development Computing Dance Drama Food French Geography Graphic Products History ICT Media Studies Music PE Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

INTRODUCTION (continued)

Additional qualifications

In addition to the subjects offered at Honley High School a small number of students may be able to study an additional learning course through our links with other schools and colleges Places on these courses will be strictly limited and students will be required to go through a selection process You must choose one extra option if wanting a place on an additional learning course as these courses are taken in addition to the 4 option subjects in school Taking an additional learning course places extra demands upon the learnerrsquos time and commitment and this must be considered carefully when looking to take any of these courses Students will be expected to travel independently to and from the providing school or college and therefore there may be additional costs associated with studying the course At the time of publishing this booklet we have not received details about the courses that will be available from September 2013 but may include the following subjects Photography GCSE Animal Care BTEC Engineering NVQ Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC Please indicate on the options form if you wish to be informed about any of the additional learning courses when details are made available to the school

ADDITIONAL QUALIFICATIONS

C How to decide ndash who will help you

Do you remember the practical hints given at the beginning of this booklet and in your ldquoDirectionsrdquo book from Calderdale and Kirklees Careers If not look at them again Think carefully about the effect that your choices now will have on your future plans At your Guidance Interview you will have reflected on your strengths and have thought about the kind of subjects and qualifications that would affect future possible career ideas Donrsquot worry - help is at hand There are many people waiting to answer your questions or give you advice You have already got an Action Plan in your Individual Learning Plan which shows small steps you need to take to ensure you make an informed choice Your subject teachers ndash the experts who know most about the courses and your ability Your form tutor ndash who knows most about you and can point you in the right direction for advice PSHCE ndash careers programme using ldquoDirectionsrdquo booklet Careers Advisers ndash give advice about career opportunities and decision making Employers ndash who can give you advice about training and employment Your parentscarers ndash who know you best as a person Library resources ndash useful information in the careers library Computer resources ndash programs such as ldquoKudosrdquo and ldquoCareerscaperdquo on wwwcascaidcouk Calderdale and Kirklees Careers Service ndash wwwworkaboutorguk where you can order free career ideasjob information leaflets University websites ndash some students already have a very clear idea about what university and or degree course they may wish to study in the future In addition to individual university websites we recommend that you look at the following for information on helpful subject combinations at GCSE and A level wwwrussellgroupacuk - The Russell Group represents 24 leading UK universities and has advice about lsquofacilitatingrsquo subjects at GCSE which will be needed for entry into the top UK universities wwwucasacuk - Central organisation through which applications are processed for entry to both sixth form education and universities

HOW TO DECIDE ndash WHO WILL HELP YOU

D Careers Education and Guidance

During the autumn term of Year 9 you will have followed a planned programme of Careers Education and Guidance Within form groups during personal social health and citizenship education you will have some lessons in which to study a variety of topics that relate to subject choice these are as follows Making choices and decisions Self-awareness Subject options Qualifications awareness During these sessions you were given a copy of ldquoDirectionsrdquo which contains some useful information on choices subjects decisions courses exams and qualifications You will also have had ICT sessions during which you were introduced to Careers software such as Kudos and Careerscape this software can be accessed in school and on-line and will enable you to further develop ideas and plans for possible career pathways You may have made an Action Plan on Kudos to help you make an informed choice You will have had a 11 Guidance Interview with a member of staff who has offered you impartial informationadvice on qualifications and who has assisted in completing an action plan for you to try to ensure you make an informed choice Remember choosing the right career option can be difficult now is a good time to start to consider what opportunities are available

E Options Choices Form

At the back of this booklet is a Year 10 Choices Form clearly showing the choices available to you in Year 10 Please read the instructions on the form very carefully before you complete it When you have filled in your form please return it to Student Services by Thursday 14 February at the latest Once the option choices forms are collected the Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally problems may arise because of the numbers of students choosing particular subjects It is not possible to run some subjects when only a small number of students opt to take them other subjects can only accommodate limited numbers with existing facilities In the event of such problems the reserve choices will be considered as a possible option for individual students Once these decisions are made it can be difficult to change them which is why it is so important that you think carefully before you choose If you have any queries about the options process or the completion of the form please contact Mrs H Rogers Deputy Headteacher at the school

CAREERs INFORMATION and INDIVIDUAL CHOICES FORM

F Frequently Asked Questions

Can I do the same subjects as my friends Answer This is not a good basis for making your decision Your friends will have different ideas to you and may enjoy different types of subjects Choose subjects for yourself and try not to be influenced by your friends In any case you may choose the same subject as your friends and then find that you have been put into another group I like my teacher Can I be in hisher group next year Answer The teacher that you will be given will depend upon the choices you have made It is not possible to choose a teacher Choose a subject because you like the subject and think you can do well in it Will I get the subjects that I have chosen Answer We try our very best to give students the subject choices that they have requested Unfortunately in a small minority of cases it is not possible to give all choices due to the combination of subjects that you are wishing to do Please bear this in mind when choosing your reserve options Can I change my mind when I start the course in Year 10 Answer The short answer to this question is no We have spent a lot of time looking at the subjects we have offered you and provided you with guidance based on prior attainment and your own future aspirations Please make sure that you look carefully at the options that you are choosing and seek further advice now if you are in doubt

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

G YEAR 9 OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012-2013

Autumn Term 2012 Citizenship lessons on making choices amp careers

Individual 11 guidance interviews with a key member of staff

Monday 28 January 2013

Assembly Mrs Rogers to talk to Year 9 students about the option choices and procedures

Thursday 31 January 2013

Year 9 Options Fair Parents and students are invited to attend from 7pm to 830pm for a presentation about the Options

process and short presentations from subjects about the courses available at GCSE In addition there will be the opportunity to meet key staff

Thursday 14 February 2013

Deadline for return of individual choices forms

March 2013 ndash July 2013

Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally the reserve choices will need to be considered as a possible option for individual

students

Summer 2013

The school timetable for 2013-2014 is written

OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012 - 2013

H Course Outlines

CORE GCSE

SUBJECTS

ENGLISH GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE English requires a lot of creativity and effort but donrsquot let this put you off because the course is actually quite enjoyable and interesting Itrsquos not just about reading books and writing essays ndash you will do orals which can be quite easy (especially if yoursquore a drama student) You will also do work on spoken English and the media By the end of the course you will be able to understand poems that at first seemed to make no sense understand Shakespearian language and generally feel a lot cleverer

WHY STUDY ENGLISH Whether you continue your education after Year 11 or leave to seek employment English is the vital qualification which every employer requires and every institute of further or higher education demands Students with good grades in the subject have gone on to become doctors journalists scientists lawyers and even writers themselves The skills of appreciation learned in an English lesson arenrsquot however just limited to helping you obtain a good job Hopefully the enjoyment of a good play or book will stay with you and enhance the quality of the rest of your life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will follow an integrated programme of English involving Reading Writing Speaking and Listening leading to GCSE certification at Key Stage 4 of the National Curriculum The course involves the production of a file of work produced under controlled conditions and work completed under examination conditions Entry is available at Higher (Grades A to D) or Foundation (Grades C to G) Level For English Language you will produce three controlled conditions assignments an extended reading task based on a text you have read in class two pieces of creative writing and a spoken language study You will also be assessed in three Speaking and Listening activities A presentation taking part in a discussion and playing a role In addition you will sit an external examination lasting two hours fifteen minutes where you will complete a Reading section based on non fiction and a Writing section with two short writing tasks Most students will also be entered for English Literature which will assess your ability to respond to additional prose and poetry studied on the course You will produce one controlled conditions assignment comparing a play by Shakespeare with another text In addition you will sit two external examinations which will examine your response to other texts some of which will have already been studied on the English course

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn through a variety of learning and teaching styles familiar from Key Stage 3 including individual pair group and whole class discussion You will learn by developing the skills of note-making and preparing work under rigorous time constraints You will learn by using ICT and the media to support your own research

PROGRESSION Good GCSE grades in English could lead to the study of English Language or English Literature at Advanced level A minimum grade C is required in order to progress on to any form of further education

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT ENGLISH LANGUAGE ndash AQA 40 examination 40 written coursework - teacher assessed 20 oral coursework - teacher assessed ENGLISH LITERATURE ndash AQA 75 examination 25 written coursework -teacher assessed

For more information about studying English at GCSE see Mr Shaw

See the full English Language specification at httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLANGA-W-TRB-SPGPDF

English Literature httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLIT-W-TRB-SPGPDF

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

In order to help you make the right choices and for the right reasons read the information in this booklet carefully Once option courses have been allocated it is very difficult to make changes and your preferred subject may no longer be available due to timetable and group size restrictions

DO Read all the information about the choices available Attend the Options Fair on 31 January to discuss possible options and hear about the options

choice procedure Try to gain variety in your courses by looking carefully at the different skills and controlled

assessment demands involved in each of the 5 lists of subject choices Choose subjects which you enjoy you are good at and which may be useful to you in your future

career

DO NOT Choose a subject because you like the teacher (they may not teach GCSE next year) Choose a subject because your friend is choosing it They may well have different plans for the

future

B Option Subjects

GCSE subjects ndash each subject counts as one option You will need to take four of these subjects in addition to the core subjects Art and Design Business Studies Child Development Computing Dance Drama Food French Geography Graphic Products History ICT Media Studies Music PE Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

INTRODUCTION (continued)

Additional qualifications

In addition to the subjects offered at Honley High School a small number of students may be able to study an additional learning course through our links with other schools and colleges Places on these courses will be strictly limited and students will be required to go through a selection process You must choose one extra option if wanting a place on an additional learning course as these courses are taken in addition to the 4 option subjects in school Taking an additional learning course places extra demands upon the learnerrsquos time and commitment and this must be considered carefully when looking to take any of these courses Students will be expected to travel independently to and from the providing school or college and therefore there may be additional costs associated with studying the course At the time of publishing this booklet we have not received details about the courses that will be available from September 2013 but may include the following subjects Photography GCSE Animal Care BTEC Engineering NVQ Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC Please indicate on the options form if you wish to be informed about any of the additional learning courses when details are made available to the school

ADDITIONAL QUALIFICATIONS

C How to decide ndash who will help you

Do you remember the practical hints given at the beginning of this booklet and in your ldquoDirectionsrdquo book from Calderdale and Kirklees Careers If not look at them again Think carefully about the effect that your choices now will have on your future plans At your Guidance Interview you will have reflected on your strengths and have thought about the kind of subjects and qualifications that would affect future possible career ideas Donrsquot worry - help is at hand There are many people waiting to answer your questions or give you advice You have already got an Action Plan in your Individual Learning Plan which shows small steps you need to take to ensure you make an informed choice Your subject teachers ndash the experts who know most about the courses and your ability Your form tutor ndash who knows most about you and can point you in the right direction for advice PSHCE ndash careers programme using ldquoDirectionsrdquo booklet Careers Advisers ndash give advice about career opportunities and decision making Employers ndash who can give you advice about training and employment Your parentscarers ndash who know you best as a person Library resources ndash useful information in the careers library Computer resources ndash programs such as ldquoKudosrdquo and ldquoCareerscaperdquo on wwwcascaidcouk Calderdale and Kirklees Careers Service ndash wwwworkaboutorguk where you can order free career ideasjob information leaflets University websites ndash some students already have a very clear idea about what university and or degree course they may wish to study in the future In addition to individual university websites we recommend that you look at the following for information on helpful subject combinations at GCSE and A level wwwrussellgroupacuk - The Russell Group represents 24 leading UK universities and has advice about lsquofacilitatingrsquo subjects at GCSE which will be needed for entry into the top UK universities wwwucasacuk - Central organisation through which applications are processed for entry to both sixth form education and universities

HOW TO DECIDE ndash WHO WILL HELP YOU

D Careers Education and Guidance

During the autumn term of Year 9 you will have followed a planned programme of Careers Education and Guidance Within form groups during personal social health and citizenship education you will have some lessons in which to study a variety of topics that relate to subject choice these are as follows Making choices and decisions Self-awareness Subject options Qualifications awareness During these sessions you were given a copy of ldquoDirectionsrdquo which contains some useful information on choices subjects decisions courses exams and qualifications You will also have had ICT sessions during which you were introduced to Careers software such as Kudos and Careerscape this software can be accessed in school and on-line and will enable you to further develop ideas and plans for possible career pathways You may have made an Action Plan on Kudos to help you make an informed choice You will have had a 11 Guidance Interview with a member of staff who has offered you impartial informationadvice on qualifications and who has assisted in completing an action plan for you to try to ensure you make an informed choice Remember choosing the right career option can be difficult now is a good time to start to consider what opportunities are available

E Options Choices Form

At the back of this booklet is a Year 10 Choices Form clearly showing the choices available to you in Year 10 Please read the instructions on the form very carefully before you complete it When you have filled in your form please return it to Student Services by Thursday 14 February at the latest Once the option choices forms are collected the Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally problems may arise because of the numbers of students choosing particular subjects It is not possible to run some subjects when only a small number of students opt to take them other subjects can only accommodate limited numbers with existing facilities In the event of such problems the reserve choices will be considered as a possible option for individual students Once these decisions are made it can be difficult to change them which is why it is so important that you think carefully before you choose If you have any queries about the options process or the completion of the form please contact Mrs H Rogers Deputy Headteacher at the school

CAREERs INFORMATION and INDIVIDUAL CHOICES FORM

F Frequently Asked Questions

Can I do the same subjects as my friends Answer This is not a good basis for making your decision Your friends will have different ideas to you and may enjoy different types of subjects Choose subjects for yourself and try not to be influenced by your friends In any case you may choose the same subject as your friends and then find that you have been put into another group I like my teacher Can I be in hisher group next year Answer The teacher that you will be given will depend upon the choices you have made It is not possible to choose a teacher Choose a subject because you like the subject and think you can do well in it Will I get the subjects that I have chosen Answer We try our very best to give students the subject choices that they have requested Unfortunately in a small minority of cases it is not possible to give all choices due to the combination of subjects that you are wishing to do Please bear this in mind when choosing your reserve options Can I change my mind when I start the course in Year 10 Answer The short answer to this question is no We have spent a lot of time looking at the subjects we have offered you and provided you with guidance based on prior attainment and your own future aspirations Please make sure that you look carefully at the options that you are choosing and seek further advice now if you are in doubt

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

G YEAR 9 OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012-2013

Autumn Term 2012 Citizenship lessons on making choices amp careers

Individual 11 guidance interviews with a key member of staff

Monday 28 January 2013

Assembly Mrs Rogers to talk to Year 9 students about the option choices and procedures

Thursday 31 January 2013

Year 9 Options Fair Parents and students are invited to attend from 7pm to 830pm for a presentation about the Options

process and short presentations from subjects about the courses available at GCSE In addition there will be the opportunity to meet key staff

Thursday 14 February 2013

Deadline for return of individual choices forms

March 2013 ndash July 2013

Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally the reserve choices will need to be considered as a possible option for individual

students

Summer 2013

The school timetable for 2013-2014 is written

OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012 - 2013

H Course Outlines

CORE GCSE

SUBJECTS

ENGLISH GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE English requires a lot of creativity and effort but donrsquot let this put you off because the course is actually quite enjoyable and interesting Itrsquos not just about reading books and writing essays ndash you will do orals which can be quite easy (especially if yoursquore a drama student) You will also do work on spoken English and the media By the end of the course you will be able to understand poems that at first seemed to make no sense understand Shakespearian language and generally feel a lot cleverer

WHY STUDY ENGLISH Whether you continue your education after Year 11 or leave to seek employment English is the vital qualification which every employer requires and every institute of further or higher education demands Students with good grades in the subject have gone on to become doctors journalists scientists lawyers and even writers themselves The skills of appreciation learned in an English lesson arenrsquot however just limited to helping you obtain a good job Hopefully the enjoyment of a good play or book will stay with you and enhance the quality of the rest of your life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will follow an integrated programme of English involving Reading Writing Speaking and Listening leading to GCSE certification at Key Stage 4 of the National Curriculum The course involves the production of a file of work produced under controlled conditions and work completed under examination conditions Entry is available at Higher (Grades A to D) or Foundation (Grades C to G) Level For English Language you will produce three controlled conditions assignments an extended reading task based on a text you have read in class two pieces of creative writing and a spoken language study You will also be assessed in three Speaking and Listening activities A presentation taking part in a discussion and playing a role In addition you will sit an external examination lasting two hours fifteen minutes where you will complete a Reading section based on non fiction and a Writing section with two short writing tasks Most students will also be entered for English Literature which will assess your ability to respond to additional prose and poetry studied on the course You will produce one controlled conditions assignment comparing a play by Shakespeare with another text In addition you will sit two external examinations which will examine your response to other texts some of which will have already been studied on the English course

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn through a variety of learning and teaching styles familiar from Key Stage 3 including individual pair group and whole class discussion You will learn by developing the skills of note-making and preparing work under rigorous time constraints You will learn by using ICT and the media to support your own research

PROGRESSION Good GCSE grades in English could lead to the study of English Language or English Literature at Advanced level A minimum grade C is required in order to progress on to any form of further education

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT ENGLISH LANGUAGE ndash AQA 40 examination 40 written coursework - teacher assessed 20 oral coursework - teacher assessed ENGLISH LITERATURE ndash AQA 75 examination 25 written coursework -teacher assessed

For more information about studying English at GCSE see Mr Shaw

See the full English Language specification at httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLANGA-W-TRB-SPGPDF

English Literature httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLIT-W-TRB-SPGPDF

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

Additional qualifications

In addition to the subjects offered at Honley High School a small number of students may be able to study an additional learning course through our links with other schools and colleges Places on these courses will be strictly limited and students will be required to go through a selection process You must choose one extra option if wanting a place on an additional learning course as these courses are taken in addition to the 4 option subjects in school Taking an additional learning course places extra demands upon the learnerrsquos time and commitment and this must be considered carefully when looking to take any of these courses Students will be expected to travel independently to and from the providing school or college and therefore there may be additional costs associated with studying the course At the time of publishing this booklet we have not received details about the courses that will be available from September 2013 but may include the following subjects Photography GCSE Animal Care BTEC Engineering NVQ Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC Please indicate on the options form if you wish to be informed about any of the additional learning courses when details are made available to the school

ADDITIONAL QUALIFICATIONS

C How to decide ndash who will help you

Do you remember the practical hints given at the beginning of this booklet and in your ldquoDirectionsrdquo book from Calderdale and Kirklees Careers If not look at them again Think carefully about the effect that your choices now will have on your future plans At your Guidance Interview you will have reflected on your strengths and have thought about the kind of subjects and qualifications that would affect future possible career ideas Donrsquot worry - help is at hand There are many people waiting to answer your questions or give you advice You have already got an Action Plan in your Individual Learning Plan which shows small steps you need to take to ensure you make an informed choice Your subject teachers ndash the experts who know most about the courses and your ability Your form tutor ndash who knows most about you and can point you in the right direction for advice PSHCE ndash careers programme using ldquoDirectionsrdquo booklet Careers Advisers ndash give advice about career opportunities and decision making Employers ndash who can give you advice about training and employment Your parentscarers ndash who know you best as a person Library resources ndash useful information in the careers library Computer resources ndash programs such as ldquoKudosrdquo and ldquoCareerscaperdquo on wwwcascaidcouk Calderdale and Kirklees Careers Service ndash wwwworkaboutorguk where you can order free career ideasjob information leaflets University websites ndash some students already have a very clear idea about what university and or degree course they may wish to study in the future In addition to individual university websites we recommend that you look at the following for information on helpful subject combinations at GCSE and A level wwwrussellgroupacuk - The Russell Group represents 24 leading UK universities and has advice about lsquofacilitatingrsquo subjects at GCSE which will be needed for entry into the top UK universities wwwucasacuk - Central organisation through which applications are processed for entry to both sixth form education and universities

HOW TO DECIDE ndash WHO WILL HELP YOU

D Careers Education and Guidance

During the autumn term of Year 9 you will have followed a planned programme of Careers Education and Guidance Within form groups during personal social health and citizenship education you will have some lessons in which to study a variety of topics that relate to subject choice these are as follows Making choices and decisions Self-awareness Subject options Qualifications awareness During these sessions you were given a copy of ldquoDirectionsrdquo which contains some useful information on choices subjects decisions courses exams and qualifications You will also have had ICT sessions during which you were introduced to Careers software such as Kudos and Careerscape this software can be accessed in school and on-line and will enable you to further develop ideas and plans for possible career pathways You may have made an Action Plan on Kudos to help you make an informed choice You will have had a 11 Guidance Interview with a member of staff who has offered you impartial informationadvice on qualifications and who has assisted in completing an action plan for you to try to ensure you make an informed choice Remember choosing the right career option can be difficult now is a good time to start to consider what opportunities are available

E Options Choices Form

At the back of this booklet is a Year 10 Choices Form clearly showing the choices available to you in Year 10 Please read the instructions on the form very carefully before you complete it When you have filled in your form please return it to Student Services by Thursday 14 February at the latest Once the option choices forms are collected the Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally problems may arise because of the numbers of students choosing particular subjects It is not possible to run some subjects when only a small number of students opt to take them other subjects can only accommodate limited numbers with existing facilities In the event of such problems the reserve choices will be considered as a possible option for individual students Once these decisions are made it can be difficult to change them which is why it is so important that you think carefully before you choose If you have any queries about the options process or the completion of the form please contact Mrs H Rogers Deputy Headteacher at the school

CAREERs INFORMATION and INDIVIDUAL CHOICES FORM

F Frequently Asked Questions

Can I do the same subjects as my friends Answer This is not a good basis for making your decision Your friends will have different ideas to you and may enjoy different types of subjects Choose subjects for yourself and try not to be influenced by your friends In any case you may choose the same subject as your friends and then find that you have been put into another group I like my teacher Can I be in hisher group next year Answer The teacher that you will be given will depend upon the choices you have made It is not possible to choose a teacher Choose a subject because you like the subject and think you can do well in it Will I get the subjects that I have chosen Answer We try our very best to give students the subject choices that they have requested Unfortunately in a small minority of cases it is not possible to give all choices due to the combination of subjects that you are wishing to do Please bear this in mind when choosing your reserve options Can I change my mind when I start the course in Year 10 Answer The short answer to this question is no We have spent a lot of time looking at the subjects we have offered you and provided you with guidance based on prior attainment and your own future aspirations Please make sure that you look carefully at the options that you are choosing and seek further advice now if you are in doubt

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

G YEAR 9 OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012-2013

Autumn Term 2012 Citizenship lessons on making choices amp careers

Individual 11 guidance interviews with a key member of staff

Monday 28 January 2013

Assembly Mrs Rogers to talk to Year 9 students about the option choices and procedures

Thursday 31 January 2013

Year 9 Options Fair Parents and students are invited to attend from 7pm to 830pm for a presentation about the Options

process and short presentations from subjects about the courses available at GCSE In addition there will be the opportunity to meet key staff

Thursday 14 February 2013

Deadline for return of individual choices forms

March 2013 ndash July 2013

Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally the reserve choices will need to be considered as a possible option for individual

students

Summer 2013

The school timetable for 2013-2014 is written

OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012 - 2013

H Course Outlines

CORE GCSE

SUBJECTS

ENGLISH GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE English requires a lot of creativity and effort but donrsquot let this put you off because the course is actually quite enjoyable and interesting Itrsquos not just about reading books and writing essays ndash you will do orals which can be quite easy (especially if yoursquore a drama student) You will also do work on spoken English and the media By the end of the course you will be able to understand poems that at first seemed to make no sense understand Shakespearian language and generally feel a lot cleverer

WHY STUDY ENGLISH Whether you continue your education after Year 11 or leave to seek employment English is the vital qualification which every employer requires and every institute of further or higher education demands Students with good grades in the subject have gone on to become doctors journalists scientists lawyers and even writers themselves The skills of appreciation learned in an English lesson arenrsquot however just limited to helping you obtain a good job Hopefully the enjoyment of a good play or book will stay with you and enhance the quality of the rest of your life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will follow an integrated programme of English involving Reading Writing Speaking and Listening leading to GCSE certification at Key Stage 4 of the National Curriculum The course involves the production of a file of work produced under controlled conditions and work completed under examination conditions Entry is available at Higher (Grades A to D) or Foundation (Grades C to G) Level For English Language you will produce three controlled conditions assignments an extended reading task based on a text you have read in class two pieces of creative writing and a spoken language study You will also be assessed in three Speaking and Listening activities A presentation taking part in a discussion and playing a role In addition you will sit an external examination lasting two hours fifteen minutes where you will complete a Reading section based on non fiction and a Writing section with two short writing tasks Most students will also be entered for English Literature which will assess your ability to respond to additional prose and poetry studied on the course You will produce one controlled conditions assignment comparing a play by Shakespeare with another text In addition you will sit two external examinations which will examine your response to other texts some of which will have already been studied on the English course

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn through a variety of learning and teaching styles familiar from Key Stage 3 including individual pair group and whole class discussion You will learn by developing the skills of note-making and preparing work under rigorous time constraints You will learn by using ICT and the media to support your own research

PROGRESSION Good GCSE grades in English could lead to the study of English Language or English Literature at Advanced level A minimum grade C is required in order to progress on to any form of further education

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT ENGLISH LANGUAGE ndash AQA 40 examination 40 written coursework - teacher assessed 20 oral coursework - teacher assessed ENGLISH LITERATURE ndash AQA 75 examination 25 written coursework -teacher assessed

For more information about studying English at GCSE see Mr Shaw

See the full English Language specification at httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLANGA-W-TRB-SPGPDF

English Literature httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLIT-W-TRB-SPGPDF

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

C How to decide ndash who will help you

Do you remember the practical hints given at the beginning of this booklet and in your ldquoDirectionsrdquo book from Calderdale and Kirklees Careers If not look at them again Think carefully about the effect that your choices now will have on your future plans At your Guidance Interview you will have reflected on your strengths and have thought about the kind of subjects and qualifications that would affect future possible career ideas Donrsquot worry - help is at hand There are many people waiting to answer your questions or give you advice You have already got an Action Plan in your Individual Learning Plan which shows small steps you need to take to ensure you make an informed choice Your subject teachers ndash the experts who know most about the courses and your ability Your form tutor ndash who knows most about you and can point you in the right direction for advice PSHCE ndash careers programme using ldquoDirectionsrdquo booklet Careers Advisers ndash give advice about career opportunities and decision making Employers ndash who can give you advice about training and employment Your parentscarers ndash who know you best as a person Library resources ndash useful information in the careers library Computer resources ndash programs such as ldquoKudosrdquo and ldquoCareerscaperdquo on wwwcascaidcouk Calderdale and Kirklees Careers Service ndash wwwworkaboutorguk where you can order free career ideasjob information leaflets University websites ndash some students already have a very clear idea about what university and or degree course they may wish to study in the future In addition to individual university websites we recommend that you look at the following for information on helpful subject combinations at GCSE and A level wwwrussellgroupacuk - The Russell Group represents 24 leading UK universities and has advice about lsquofacilitatingrsquo subjects at GCSE which will be needed for entry into the top UK universities wwwucasacuk - Central organisation through which applications are processed for entry to both sixth form education and universities

HOW TO DECIDE ndash WHO WILL HELP YOU

D Careers Education and Guidance

During the autumn term of Year 9 you will have followed a planned programme of Careers Education and Guidance Within form groups during personal social health and citizenship education you will have some lessons in which to study a variety of topics that relate to subject choice these are as follows Making choices and decisions Self-awareness Subject options Qualifications awareness During these sessions you were given a copy of ldquoDirectionsrdquo which contains some useful information on choices subjects decisions courses exams and qualifications You will also have had ICT sessions during which you were introduced to Careers software such as Kudos and Careerscape this software can be accessed in school and on-line and will enable you to further develop ideas and plans for possible career pathways You may have made an Action Plan on Kudos to help you make an informed choice You will have had a 11 Guidance Interview with a member of staff who has offered you impartial informationadvice on qualifications and who has assisted in completing an action plan for you to try to ensure you make an informed choice Remember choosing the right career option can be difficult now is a good time to start to consider what opportunities are available

E Options Choices Form

At the back of this booklet is a Year 10 Choices Form clearly showing the choices available to you in Year 10 Please read the instructions on the form very carefully before you complete it When you have filled in your form please return it to Student Services by Thursday 14 February at the latest Once the option choices forms are collected the Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally problems may arise because of the numbers of students choosing particular subjects It is not possible to run some subjects when only a small number of students opt to take them other subjects can only accommodate limited numbers with existing facilities In the event of such problems the reserve choices will be considered as a possible option for individual students Once these decisions are made it can be difficult to change them which is why it is so important that you think carefully before you choose If you have any queries about the options process or the completion of the form please contact Mrs H Rogers Deputy Headteacher at the school

CAREERs INFORMATION and INDIVIDUAL CHOICES FORM

F Frequently Asked Questions

Can I do the same subjects as my friends Answer This is not a good basis for making your decision Your friends will have different ideas to you and may enjoy different types of subjects Choose subjects for yourself and try not to be influenced by your friends In any case you may choose the same subject as your friends and then find that you have been put into another group I like my teacher Can I be in hisher group next year Answer The teacher that you will be given will depend upon the choices you have made It is not possible to choose a teacher Choose a subject because you like the subject and think you can do well in it Will I get the subjects that I have chosen Answer We try our very best to give students the subject choices that they have requested Unfortunately in a small minority of cases it is not possible to give all choices due to the combination of subjects that you are wishing to do Please bear this in mind when choosing your reserve options Can I change my mind when I start the course in Year 10 Answer The short answer to this question is no We have spent a lot of time looking at the subjects we have offered you and provided you with guidance based on prior attainment and your own future aspirations Please make sure that you look carefully at the options that you are choosing and seek further advice now if you are in doubt

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

G YEAR 9 OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012-2013

Autumn Term 2012 Citizenship lessons on making choices amp careers

Individual 11 guidance interviews with a key member of staff

Monday 28 January 2013

Assembly Mrs Rogers to talk to Year 9 students about the option choices and procedures

Thursday 31 January 2013

Year 9 Options Fair Parents and students are invited to attend from 7pm to 830pm for a presentation about the Options

process and short presentations from subjects about the courses available at GCSE In addition there will be the opportunity to meet key staff

Thursday 14 February 2013

Deadline for return of individual choices forms

March 2013 ndash July 2013

Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally the reserve choices will need to be considered as a possible option for individual

students

Summer 2013

The school timetable for 2013-2014 is written

OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012 - 2013

H Course Outlines

CORE GCSE

SUBJECTS

ENGLISH GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE English requires a lot of creativity and effort but donrsquot let this put you off because the course is actually quite enjoyable and interesting Itrsquos not just about reading books and writing essays ndash you will do orals which can be quite easy (especially if yoursquore a drama student) You will also do work on spoken English and the media By the end of the course you will be able to understand poems that at first seemed to make no sense understand Shakespearian language and generally feel a lot cleverer

WHY STUDY ENGLISH Whether you continue your education after Year 11 or leave to seek employment English is the vital qualification which every employer requires and every institute of further or higher education demands Students with good grades in the subject have gone on to become doctors journalists scientists lawyers and even writers themselves The skills of appreciation learned in an English lesson arenrsquot however just limited to helping you obtain a good job Hopefully the enjoyment of a good play or book will stay with you and enhance the quality of the rest of your life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will follow an integrated programme of English involving Reading Writing Speaking and Listening leading to GCSE certification at Key Stage 4 of the National Curriculum The course involves the production of a file of work produced under controlled conditions and work completed under examination conditions Entry is available at Higher (Grades A to D) or Foundation (Grades C to G) Level For English Language you will produce three controlled conditions assignments an extended reading task based on a text you have read in class two pieces of creative writing and a spoken language study You will also be assessed in three Speaking and Listening activities A presentation taking part in a discussion and playing a role In addition you will sit an external examination lasting two hours fifteen minutes where you will complete a Reading section based on non fiction and a Writing section with two short writing tasks Most students will also be entered for English Literature which will assess your ability to respond to additional prose and poetry studied on the course You will produce one controlled conditions assignment comparing a play by Shakespeare with another text In addition you will sit two external examinations which will examine your response to other texts some of which will have already been studied on the English course

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn through a variety of learning and teaching styles familiar from Key Stage 3 including individual pair group and whole class discussion You will learn by developing the skills of note-making and preparing work under rigorous time constraints You will learn by using ICT and the media to support your own research

PROGRESSION Good GCSE grades in English could lead to the study of English Language or English Literature at Advanced level A minimum grade C is required in order to progress on to any form of further education

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT ENGLISH LANGUAGE ndash AQA 40 examination 40 written coursework - teacher assessed 20 oral coursework - teacher assessed ENGLISH LITERATURE ndash AQA 75 examination 25 written coursework -teacher assessed

For more information about studying English at GCSE see Mr Shaw

See the full English Language specification at httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLANGA-W-TRB-SPGPDF

English Literature httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLIT-W-TRB-SPGPDF

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

D Careers Education and Guidance

During the autumn term of Year 9 you will have followed a planned programme of Careers Education and Guidance Within form groups during personal social health and citizenship education you will have some lessons in which to study a variety of topics that relate to subject choice these are as follows Making choices and decisions Self-awareness Subject options Qualifications awareness During these sessions you were given a copy of ldquoDirectionsrdquo which contains some useful information on choices subjects decisions courses exams and qualifications You will also have had ICT sessions during which you were introduced to Careers software such as Kudos and Careerscape this software can be accessed in school and on-line and will enable you to further develop ideas and plans for possible career pathways You may have made an Action Plan on Kudos to help you make an informed choice You will have had a 11 Guidance Interview with a member of staff who has offered you impartial informationadvice on qualifications and who has assisted in completing an action plan for you to try to ensure you make an informed choice Remember choosing the right career option can be difficult now is a good time to start to consider what opportunities are available

E Options Choices Form

At the back of this booklet is a Year 10 Choices Form clearly showing the choices available to you in Year 10 Please read the instructions on the form very carefully before you complete it When you have filled in your form please return it to Student Services by Thursday 14 February at the latest Once the option choices forms are collected the Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally problems may arise because of the numbers of students choosing particular subjects It is not possible to run some subjects when only a small number of students opt to take them other subjects can only accommodate limited numbers with existing facilities In the event of such problems the reserve choices will be considered as a possible option for individual students Once these decisions are made it can be difficult to change them which is why it is so important that you think carefully before you choose If you have any queries about the options process or the completion of the form please contact Mrs H Rogers Deputy Headteacher at the school

CAREERs INFORMATION and INDIVIDUAL CHOICES FORM

F Frequently Asked Questions

Can I do the same subjects as my friends Answer This is not a good basis for making your decision Your friends will have different ideas to you and may enjoy different types of subjects Choose subjects for yourself and try not to be influenced by your friends In any case you may choose the same subject as your friends and then find that you have been put into another group I like my teacher Can I be in hisher group next year Answer The teacher that you will be given will depend upon the choices you have made It is not possible to choose a teacher Choose a subject because you like the subject and think you can do well in it Will I get the subjects that I have chosen Answer We try our very best to give students the subject choices that they have requested Unfortunately in a small minority of cases it is not possible to give all choices due to the combination of subjects that you are wishing to do Please bear this in mind when choosing your reserve options Can I change my mind when I start the course in Year 10 Answer The short answer to this question is no We have spent a lot of time looking at the subjects we have offered you and provided you with guidance based on prior attainment and your own future aspirations Please make sure that you look carefully at the options that you are choosing and seek further advice now if you are in doubt

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

G YEAR 9 OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012-2013

Autumn Term 2012 Citizenship lessons on making choices amp careers

Individual 11 guidance interviews with a key member of staff

Monday 28 January 2013

Assembly Mrs Rogers to talk to Year 9 students about the option choices and procedures

Thursday 31 January 2013

Year 9 Options Fair Parents and students are invited to attend from 7pm to 830pm for a presentation about the Options

process and short presentations from subjects about the courses available at GCSE In addition there will be the opportunity to meet key staff

Thursday 14 February 2013

Deadline for return of individual choices forms

March 2013 ndash July 2013

Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally the reserve choices will need to be considered as a possible option for individual

students

Summer 2013

The school timetable for 2013-2014 is written

OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012 - 2013

H Course Outlines

CORE GCSE

SUBJECTS

ENGLISH GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE English requires a lot of creativity and effort but donrsquot let this put you off because the course is actually quite enjoyable and interesting Itrsquos not just about reading books and writing essays ndash you will do orals which can be quite easy (especially if yoursquore a drama student) You will also do work on spoken English and the media By the end of the course you will be able to understand poems that at first seemed to make no sense understand Shakespearian language and generally feel a lot cleverer

WHY STUDY ENGLISH Whether you continue your education after Year 11 or leave to seek employment English is the vital qualification which every employer requires and every institute of further or higher education demands Students with good grades in the subject have gone on to become doctors journalists scientists lawyers and even writers themselves The skills of appreciation learned in an English lesson arenrsquot however just limited to helping you obtain a good job Hopefully the enjoyment of a good play or book will stay with you and enhance the quality of the rest of your life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will follow an integrated programme of English involving Reading Writing Speaking and Listening leading to GCSE certification at Key Stage 4 of the National Curriculum The course involves the production of a file of work produced under controlled conditions and work completed under examination conditions Entry is available at Higher (Grades A to D) or Foundation (Grades C to G) Level For English Language you will produce three controlled conditions assignments an extended reading task based on a text you have read in class two pieces of creative writing and a spoken language study You will also be assessed in three Speaking and Listening activities A presentation taking part in a discussion and playing a role In addition you will sit an external examination lasting two hours fifteen minutes where you will complete a Reading section based on non fiction and a Writing section with two short writing tasks Most students will also be entered for English Literature which will assess your ability to respond to additional prose and poetry studied on the course You will produce one controlled conditions assignment comparing a play by Shakespeare with another text In addition you will sit two external examinations which will examine your response to other texts some of which will have already been studied on the English course

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn through a variety of learning and teaching styles familiar from Key Stage 3 including individual pair group and whole class discussion You will learn by developing the skills of note-making and preparing work under rigorous time constraints You will learn by using ICT and the media to support your own research

PROGRESSION Good GCSE grades in English could lead to the study of English Language or English Literature at Advanced level A minimum grade C is required in order to progress on to any form of further education

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT ENGLISH LANGUAGE ndash AQA 40 examination 40 written coursework - teacher assessed 20 oral coursework - teacher assessed ENGLISH LITERATURE ndash AQA 75 examination 25 written coursework -teacher assessed

For more information about studying English at GCSE see Mr Shaw

See the full English Language specification at httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLANGA-W-TRB-SPGPDF

English Literature httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLIT-W-TRB-SPGPDF

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

F Frequently Asked Questions

Can I do the same subjects as my friends Answer This is not a good basis for making your decision Your friends will have different ideas to you and may enjoy different types of subjects Choose subjects for yourself and try not to be influenced by your friends In any case you may choose the same subject as your friends and then find that you have been put into another group I like my teacher Can I be in hisher group next year Answer The teacher that you will be given will depend upon the choices you have made It is not possible to choose a teacher Choose a subject because you like the subject and think you can do well in it Will I get the subjects that I have chosen Answer We try our very best to give students the subject choices that they have requested Unfortunately in a small minority of cases it is not possible to give all choices due to the combination of subjects that you are wishing to do Please bear this in mind when choosing your reserve options Can I change my mind when I start the course in Year 10 Answer The short answer to this question is no We have spent a lot of time looking at the subjects we have offered you and provided you with guidance based on prior attainment and your own future aspirations Please make sure that you look carefully at the options that you are choosing and seek further advice now if you are in doubt

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

G YEAR 9 OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012-2013

Autumn Term 2012 Citizenship lessons on making choices amp careers

Individual 11 guidance interviews with a key member of staff

Monday 28 January 2013

Assembly Mrs Rogers to talk to Year 9 students about the option choices and procedures

Thursday 31 January 2013

Year 9 Options Fair Parents and students are invited to attend from 7pm to 830pm for a presentation about the Options

process and short presentations from subjects about the courses available at GCSE In addition there will be the opportunity to meet key staff

Thursday 14 February 2013

Deadline for return of individual choices forms

March 2013 ndash July 2013

Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally the reserve choices will need to be considered as a possible option for individual

students

Summer 2013

The school timetable for 2013-2014 is written

OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012 - 2013

H Course Outlines

CORE GCSE

SUBJECTS

ENGLISH GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE English requires a lot of creativity and effort but donrsquot let this put you off because the course is actually quite enjoyable and interesting Itrsquos not just about reading books and writing essays ndash you will do orals which can be quite easy (especially if yoursquore a drama student) You will also do work on spoken English and the media By the end of the course you will be able to understand poems that at first seemed to make no sense understand Shakespearian language and generally feel a lot cleverer

WHY STUDY ENGLISH Whether you continue your education after Year 11 or leave to seek employment English is the vital qualification which every employer requires and every institute of further or higher education demands Students with good grades in the subject have gone on to become doctors journalists scientists lawyers and even writers themselves The skills of appreciation learned in an English lesson arenrsquot however just limited to helping you obtain a good job Hopefully the enjoyment of a good play or book will stay with you and enhance the quality of the rest of your life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will follow an integrated programme of English involving Reading Writing Speaking and Listening leading to GCSE certification at Key Stage 4 of the National Curriculum The course involves the production of a file of work produced under controlled conditions and work completed under examination conditions Entry is available at Higher (Grades A to D) or Foundation (Grades C to G) Level For English Language you will produce three controlled conditions assignments an extended reading task based on a text you have read in class two pieces of creative writing and a spoken language study You will also be assessed in three Speaking and Listening activities A presentation taking part in a discussion and playing a role In addition you will sit an external examination lasting two hours fifteen minutes where you will complete a Reading section based on non fiction and a Writing section with two short writing tasks Most students will also be entered for English Literature which will assess your ability to respond to additional prose and poetry studied on the course You will produce one controlled conditions assignment comparing a play by Shakespeare with another text In addition you will sit two external examinations which will examine your response to other texts some of which will have already been studied on the English course

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn through a variety of learning and teaching styles familiar from Key Stage 3 including individual pair group and whole class discussion You will learn by developing the skills of note-making and preparing work under rigorous time constraints You will learn by using ICT and the media to support your own research

PROGRESSION Good GCSE grades in English could lead to the study of English Language or English Literature at Advanced level A minimum grade C is required in order to progress on to any form of further education

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT ENGLISH LANGUAGE ndash AQA 40 examination 40 written coursework - teacher assessed 20 oral coursework - teacher assessed ENGLISH LITERATURE ndash AQA 75 examination 25 written coursework -teacher assessed

For more information about studying English at GCSE see Mr Shaw

See the full English Language specification at httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLANGA-W-TRB-SPGPDF

English Literature httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLIT-W-TRB-SPGPDF

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

G YEAR 9 OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012-2013

Autumn Term 2012 Citizenship lessons on making choices amp careers

Individual 11 guidance interviews with a key member of staff

Monday 28 January 2013

Assembly Mrs Rogers to talk to Year 9 students about the option choices and procedures

Thursday 31 January 2013

Year 9 Options Fair Parents and students are invited to attend from 7pm to 830pm for a presentation about the Options

process and short presentations from subjects about the courses available at GCSE In addition there will be the opportunity to meet key staff

Thursday 14 February 2013

Deadline for return of individual choices forms

March 2013 ndash July 2013

Year 9 choices are analysed and every effort is made to meet your requests Occasionally the reserve choices will need to be considered as a possible option for individual

students

Summer 2013

The school timetable for 2013-2014 is written

OPTIONS CALENDAR 2012 - 2013

H Course Outlines

CORE GCSE

SUBJECTS

ENGLISH GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE English requires a lot of creativity and effort but donrsquot let this put you off because the course is actually quite enjoyable and interesting Itrsquos not just about reading books and writing essays ndash you will do orals which can be quite easy (especially if yoursquore a drama student) You will also do work on spoken English and the media By the end of the course you will be able to understand poems that at first seemed to make no sense understand Shakespearian language and generally feel a lot cleverer

WHY STUDY ENGLISH Whether you continue your education after Year 11 or leave to seek employment English is the vital qualification which every employer requires and every institute of further or higher education demands Students with good grades in the subject have gone on to become doctors journalists scientists lawyers and even writers themselves The skills of appreciation learned in an English lesson arenrsquot however just limited to helping you obtain a good job Hopefully the enjoyment of a good play or book will stay with you and enhance the quality of the rest of your life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will follow an integrated programme of English involving Reading Writing Speaking and Listening leading to GCSE certification at Key Stage 4 of the National Curriculum The course involves the production of a file of work produced under controlled conditions and work completed under examination conditions Entry is available at Higher (Grades A to D) or Foundation (Grades C to G) Level For English Language you will produce three controlled conditions assignments an extended reading task based on a text you have read in class two pieces of creative writing and a spoken language study You will also be assessed in three Speaking and Listening activities A presentation taking part in a discussion and playing a role In addition you will sit an external examination lasting two hours fifteen minutes where you will complete a Reading section based on non fiction and a Writing section with two short writing tasks Most students will also be entered for English Literature which will assess your ability to respond to additional prose and poetry studied on the course You will produce one controlled conditions assignment comparing a play by Shakespeare with another text In addition you will sit two external examinations which will examine your response to other texts some of which will have already been studied on the English course

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn through a variety of learning and teaching styles familiar from Key Stage 3 including individual pair group and whole class discussion You will learn by developing the skills of note-making and preparing work under rigorous time constraints You will learn by using ICT and the media to support your own research

PROGRESSION Good GCSE grades in English could lead to the study of English Language or English Literature at Advanced level A minimum grade C is required in order to progress on to any form of further education

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT ENGLISH LANGUAGE ndash AQA 40 examination 40 written coursework - teacher assessed 20 oral coursework - teacher assessed ENGLISH LITERATURE ndash AQA 75 examination 25 written coursework -teacher assessed

For more information about studying English at GCSE see Mr Shaw

See the full English Language specification at httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLANGA-W-TRB-SPGPDF

English Literature httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLIT-W-TRB-SPGPDF

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

H Course Outlines

CORE GCSE

SUBJECTS

ENGLISH GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE English requires a lot of creativity and effort but donrsquot let this put you off because the course is actually quite enjoyable and interesting Itrsquos not just about reading books and writing essays ndash you will do orals which can be quite easy (especially if yoursquore a drama student) You will also do work on spoken English and the media By the end of the course you will be able to understand poems that at first seemed to make no sense understand Shakespearian language and generally feel a lot cleverer

WHY STUDY ENGLISH Whether you continue your education after Year 11 or leave to seek employment English is the vital qualification which every employer requires and every institute of further or higher education demands Students with good grades in the subject have gone on to become doctors journalists scientists lawyers and even writers themselves The skills of appreciation learned in an English lesson arenrsquot however just limited to helping you obtain a good job Hopefully the enjoyment of a good play or book will stay with you and enhance the quality of the rest of your life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will follow an integrated programme of English involving Reading Writing Speaking and Listening leading to GCSE certification at Key Stage 4 of the National Curriculum The course involves the production of a file of work produced under controlled conditions and work completed under examination conditions Entry is available at Higher (Grades A to D) or Foundation (Grades C to G) Level For English Language you will produce three controlled conditions assignments an extended reading task based on a text you have read in class two pieces of creative writing and a spoken language study You will also be assessed in three Speaking and Listening activities A presentation taking part in a discussion and playing a role In addition you will sit an external examination lasting two hours fifteen minutes where you will complete a Reading section based on non fiction and a Writing section with two short writing tasks Most students will also be entered for English Literature which will assess your ability to respond to additional prose and poetry studied on the course You will produce one controlled conditions assignment comparing a play by Shakespeare with another text In addition you will sit two external examinations which will examine your response to other texts some of which will have already been studied on the English course

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn through a variety of learning and teaching styles familiar from Key Stage 3 including individual pair group and whole class discussion You will learn by developing the skills of note-making and preparing work under rigorous time constraints You will learn by using ICT and the media to support your own research

PROGRESSION Good GCSE grades in English could lead to the study of English Language or English Literature at Advanced level A minimum grade C is required in order to progress on to any form of further education

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT ENGLISH LANGUAGE ndash AQA 40 examination 40 written coursework - teacher assessed 20 oral coursework - teacher assessed ENGLISH LITERATURE ndash AQA 75 examination 25 written coursework -teacher assessed

For more information about studying English at GCSE see Mr Shaw

See the full English Language specification at httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLANGA-W-TRB-SPGPDF

English Literature httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLIT-W-TRB-SPGPDF

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

ENGLISH GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE English requires a lot of creativity and effort but donrsquot let this put you off because the course is actually quite enjoyable and interesting Itrsquos not just about reading books and writing essays ndash you will do orals which can be quite easy (especially if yoursquore a drama student) You will also do work on spoken English and the media By the end of the course you will be able to understand poems that at first seemed to make no sense understand Shakespearian language and generally feel a lot cleverer

WHY STUDY ENGLISH Whether you continue your education after Year 11 or leave to seek employment English is the vital qualification which every employer requires and every institute of further or higher education demands Students with good grades in the subject have gone on to become doctors journalists scientists lawyers and even writers themselves The skills of appreciation learned in an English lesson arenrsquot however just limited to helping you obtain a good job Hopefully the enjoyment of a good play or book will stay with you and enhance the quality of the rest of your life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will follow an integrated programme of English involving Reading Writing Speaking and Listening leading to GCSE certification at Key Stage 4 of the National Curriculum The course involves the production of a file of work produced under controlled conditions and work completed under examination conditions Entry is available at Higher (Grades A to D) or Foundation (Grades C to G) Level For English Language you will produce three controlled conditions assignments an extended reading task based on a text you have read in class two pieces of creative writing and a spoken language study You will also be assessed in three Speaking and Listening activities A presentation taking part in a discussion and playing a role In addition you will sit an external examination lasting two hours fifteen minutes where you will complete a Reading section based on non fiction and a Writing section with two short writing tasks Most students will also be entered for English Literature which will assess your ability to respond to additional prose and poetry studied on the course You will produce one controlled conditions assignment comparing a play by Shakespeare with another text In addition you will sit two external examinations which will examine your response to other texts some of which will have already been studied on the English course

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn through a variety of learning and teaching styles familiar from Key Stage 3 including individual pair group and whole class discussion You will learn by developing the skills of note-making and preparing work under rigorous time constraints You will learn by using ICT and the media to support your own research

PROGRESSION Good GCSE grades in English could lead to the study of English Language or English Literature at Advanced level A minimum grade C is required in order to progress on to any form of further education

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT ENGLISH LANGUAGE ndash AQA 40 examination 40 written coursework - teacher assessed 20 oral coursework - teacher assessed ENGLISH LITERATURE ndash AQA 75 examination 25 written coursework -teacher assessed

For more information about studying English at GCSE see Mr Shaw

See the full English Language specification at httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLANGA-W-TRB-SPGPDF

English Literature httpstoreaqaorgukresourceZonepdfenglishAQA-ENGLIT-W-TRB-SPGPDF

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoMany people think maths is a subject for lsquoGeeksrsquo however many celebrities have a degree in maths including Brian May of Queen Virginia Wade Michael Jordan and Teri Hatcher Many people use maths without even noticing it and in industry maths is used on a daily basis ndash itrsquos the most important subject by a mile Maths is challenging satisfying and sometimes even funrdquo

WHY STUDY MATHS Mathematical problems occur in daily life A reasonable level of mathematical ability is required for many jobs Mathematics is essential for science engineering and research Mathematically informed people will be able to make better economic and political decisions in many areas

including budget allocation Studying mathematics teaches patterns of problem-solving and insight that transfer to other subjects Mathematical proof teaches skills in rigor argumentation and persuasion that also transfer to other subjects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Mathematics is a core subject which means it is compulsory to continue studying it at Key Stage 4 The subject continues to be broken down across four broad programmes of study Number Algebra Geometry and Measures and Statistics Learners are assessed against their ability to Recall and use their knowledge of the prescribed content (45-55) Select and apply mathematical methods in a range of contexts (25-35) Interpret and analyse problems and generate strategies to solve them (15-25)

Additionally from September 2012 all higher tier pupils will study GCSE Statistics within their maths class sitting this

exam at the end of Year 10

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The National curriculum recognises that learners will be working at different levels and consequently the Mathematics Department continues with its policy of setting learners according to their ability The advantage of this is that you will not be expected to undertake work which is beyond your capability and provided you show the necessary commitment you will continue to progress to a good GCSE result

PROGRESSION Mathematics and numeracy form an essential part of everyday life Pupilsrsquo may progress to study maths andor further maths at AS level however a grade C in the subject is considered essential to access most college and degree courses

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit Type

Paper 1 ndash non calculator 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher) Paper 2 ndash calculator allowed 50 1h 30 (Foundation) 1h 45 (Higher)

GCSE STATISTICS Unit 1 ndash Written exam 75 2h (all pupils will do higher tier) Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash investigation 125 Untiered Unit 2 ndash Statistics in practice ndash assessment 125 45 minutes (un-tiered)

MATHS GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Clarke

See the full GCSE specification Maths at httpwwwocrorgukqualificationstypegcse_2010mathsb Statistics - httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4310-W-SPPDF

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

DUAL SCIENCE GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD OCR

For more information about studying Mathematics at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoDoing Dual Science has allowed me to leave my options open I donrsquot know what I want to do in the future so it gives me the most choicerdquo

WHY STUDY DUAL SCIENCE Science is one of the core subjects and therefore students will have to complete this course as a minimum It provides the basic knowledge and skills needed to ensure that they can become a better more employable individual

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN All students whatever their ambitions need a science education to prepare them for their lives ahead From the knowledge they gain in science they have a better understanding about themselves their environment and the universe Some young people aspire to be scientists or to work in fields where knowledge of science is essential Students studying this suite of courses will

Gain an appreciation of how science impacts upon our lives Develop the understanding needed to make informed judgements about scientific issues that affect us all Be very well prepared for studying science related courses at a higher level Develop many skills including team work independent enquiry and effective participation

The course is essentially split into two separate GCSEs Core and Additional Science In Year 10 you will learn about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills During Year 11 there is a greater emphasis on knowledge and application of theoretical science

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element in each year will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Science will provide students with the ideal basic grounding going forward It can be used to progress onto a number of A Levels including for individual sciences However please be aware that currently there is a minimum B grade required to study Biology Chemistry and Physics ndash this minimum grade applies to the attainment for both GCSEs (Year 10 and Year 11)

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in Science Core GCSE and Additional Science GCSE at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Additional Science course is part of the Twenty First Century Science

Suite of subjects

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE CORE

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like RE because you can ask questions and talk about what you thinkrdquo ldquoYou get to share your opinion and have discussions about real life topicsrdquo ldquoI like RE because it is interesting to learn about different topicsrdquo

WHY STUDY RELIGIOUS EDUCATION Although a compulsory subject Religious Studies is an important subject for everybody People have always asked questions about life what is right and wrong Is it right to abort life Why should we care for the poor Is it ever right to go to war No sphere of life is untouched by religion and religious issues frequently top the news agenda Religious Studies provides you with the opportunity to think about moral and ethical problems and to evaluate and make choices related to them Skills that you will develop studying RE include the transferable skills of clear and logical thinking critical evaluation literacy research skills and organisational skills Jobs where RE is useful include civil service administrator advice counsellor housing adviser journalist librarian social worker teacher and youth amp community worker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN We will look at the main ideas key issues attitudes and religious views on a number of moral and controversial topics animal rights use and abuse of our planet prejudice and discrimination human life and abortion war and peace matters of life (a study of fertility treatment transplant surgery genetic engineering cloning and experimentation on humans) euthanasia crime and punishment drug abuse rich and poor in Britain and world poverty You donrsquot have to be religious to be successful in Religious Studies you just need to be interested in finding out more about other peoplersquos views and in developing your own view of life

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn using a variety of styles They will work independently in pairs small groups and participate in discussions They will use textbooks video clips etc and produce notes PowerPoint presentations and short essays

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Religious Studies will provide you with a good foundation for progression to many AS and A level courses including Sociology Psychology and Philosophy

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

2 TERMINAL EXAM PAPERS

Unit Type

Religion amp Morality

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

Religion amp Life Issues

6 Topics

50 1 hr 30 paper

Answer questions on 4 topics

For more information about studying RE at GCSE see Mr Lake

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4055-W-SPPDF

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

PHYSICAL EDUCATION and

PSHE CITIZENSHIP

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) Physical Education (PE) promotes an active and healthy lifestyle All students take part in PE for four hours per fortnight In Year 10 students choose their pathways option in either individual or team PE Individual sports include personal fitness trampolining and golf and group sports include football and hockey In Year 11 students choose from numerous activities on or off site These include squash and fitness at the sports centre golf at the Galpharm Stadium and indoor football at the Zone We also offer Sports Leaders and Duke of Edinburgh training Students can choose to work towards their GCSE qualification in PE as well as taking part in core sessions Please see the PE GCSE Option page of this booklet for further information

PERSONAL SOCIAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION (PSHE) AND CITIZENSHIP This is a compulsory part of the Key Stage 4 curriculum The course aims to bring together key issues facing young people today The subject includes health relationships careers enterprise work related learning and work experience and money management You will be given guidance on the topics and have an opportunity to discuss the choices which may affect your life It will also help you to understand and take an active role in society Themes include human rights the European Union discrimination law amp society and parenting skills

For more information about Physical Education see Mr OrsquoConnor and for further information about PSHE and

Citizenship see Mr Wilcock

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

OPTION GCSE

SUBJECTS

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

ART AND DESIGN GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoThe lessons are relaxed but you have to be organised to make sure you get everything done I enjoy working with image manipulation software and trying out different combinations of materialsrdquo (Ellie Y10) ldquoIt is a practical subject and you need to have a creative side I have learned to find inspiration in other artistsrsquo workrdquo (Lucy Y11)

WHY STUDY ART AND DESIGN If you like to learn through direct experience and experimentation love to express yourself creatively and are prepared to commit time to producing great quality work then art and design is a good option for you The creative sector is currently one of the strongest areas in the employment market and the UK has an impressive track record in producing some of the worldrsquos top designers Potential employers will be recognise that you can use your initiative think creatively and work independently which are vital transferrable skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to research other artists whose work is relevant to the theme you are studying How to record your own observations through drawing and photography A range of processes such as different types of printmaking image manipulation textiles and 3D and how to use

materials skillfully How to develop your ideas through to a final outcome

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most of the work will be practical and you will use a wide range of materials to explore ideas keeping sketchbooks to help with this You will work from observation and imagination and you will do some independent research Wherever possible we offer gallery visits for our students and this year we have teamed up with modern foreign languages to organise a trip to Barcelona

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Art and Design is the ideal stepping stone to AS and A level or vocational qualifications in Art and Design and related subjects such as Photography and Textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Portfolio 60 2 themed projects carried out in Y10 and Y11 All work displayed in your personal exhibition

Externally Set Task 40 10-hour (total) practical exam completed in class after

6-8 weeks preparation

For more information about studying Art and Design at GCSE see Mrs Shepherd

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoBusiness Studies is both an interesting and useful subject to study at GCSE incorporating both theory and application of that theory into coursework Perhaps the biggest attraction is that it continuously links with current affairs ndash I now have a greater understanding and interest in these matters thanks to the subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY BUSINESS STUDIES

Business Studies is a good option if

You are interested in how businesses operate

You are interested in the world around you

You should opt for this subject if

You would like to take a business course at college

You would like to set up a business one day or

You would like to know more about business organisations

Business studies courses give you a broad overview of how the commercial world operates Business issues are often addressed at a European and international level

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

Areas of study include business ownership external environment internal organisation business aims and objectives production marketing and finance

Students develop their understanding of business studies through applying their knowledge of theory to given situations Class discussion is important and students are encouraged to share their own perspectives and ideas

Keeping up to date with whatrsquos going on in the world is also beneficial

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

In Year 10 pupils learn what is important to consider when setting up a new business including finance objectives marketing customer focus and liability In Year 11 pupils study the growth of business organisations

Assessment is through 75 examination and 25 controlled assessment (investigating businesses) The qualification is particularly suited to pupils who may be interested in further academic study of the world of business (eg A level)

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Business Studies will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Business Studies or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Investigating Business 25 Controlled assessment

Unit 1 (Introduction to small Business)

and Unit 3 (Building a Business)

75 Exam

BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Business Studies at GCSE see Mrs Johnston Mr Patel

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09BusinessBusinessPagesdefaultaspx

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

CHILD DEVELOPMENT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

For more information about studying Child Development at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoIt is great to listen to outside visitorsmdashmidwives and health visitorsrdquo ldquoIt is useful because you learn about pregnancy birth and caring for the babymdashit will help us in later life when we become parentsrdquo ldquoIt is demanding but interesting as it is about liferdquo

WHY STUDY CHILD DEVELOPMENT The area of Child Development offers opportunities that can lead to employment in a number of career sector Midwife - A nurse especially trained in the care pregnancy and childbirth Paediatrician - A doctor who specialises in the care of children from the time they are born Obstetrician - A doctor who specialises in pregnancy and childbirth Nursery nurse - Works with young children in a nursery or cregraveche and provides care and education for pre-school children Primary School Teacher - A qualified teacher of young children who provides education for children in a school nursery infant or junior school Speech therapist - Gives advice and help to children and their parents in cases of delayed language development and speech defects

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Child Development is about the development of babies and young children aged 0-5 years It is a study of pregnancy birth care of the newborn the four areas of human development and how these can be encouraged It is also about the professionals involved in childcare and the roles of parents family and social influences You will learn about the family parenthood pre-conceptual care pregnancy antenatal care birth caring for new-born babies physical development postnatal Care social development intellectual development the importance of play managing behaviour children with special needs childhood dietary needs health and safety in the home garden and road fostering and adoption and the roles of professionals involved in child care

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will complete a range of written tasks class discussions and practical activities For example Design a lunchtime meal suitable for a pregnant woman analyse the nutritional value of the food using the lsquoFood in Focusrsquo software on a PC Watch a video series called lsquoBaby Itrsquos Yoursquo which show how the four main areas of development can be encouraged and when certain stages of development are achieved Produce a leaflet for parents outlining the stages of labour methods of pain relief and possible complications Carry out a class debate about the advantages and disadvantages of bottle and breast-feeding You will also do two tasks for the controlled assessment which includes studying a child aged between 0-5 years to observe their development over nine months You can support your learning in Child Development by finding out about children by spending time with friends or family when babies or young children are around Read information about children eg Child Development books and Psychology books Watch television programmes about the development of children Use computers and the internet to help you with your work Collect leaflets magazines and brochures about babies and children Look at existing products eg toys and equipment for babies and children in the shops and in catalogues

PROGRESSION Students can along with other GCSErsquos (5 A-C) go on to take A levels or consider vocational courses such as AwardCertificate in Caring for children L1 Diploma in Children amp Education L2 Extended Diploma in Childcare amp Education L3 Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in childcare

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment Please note that you will need to asses a child who is not yet 5 on or before January 2014

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

COMPUTING GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoThis is an excellent opportunity for me I already know how to use programs like Word and Excel I am more interested in learning how computers work and to learn how to write computer programs I want to be a games developer and think this GCSE will help me I canrsquot waitrdquo

WHY STUDY COMPUTING The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in Computing and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming For many learners it will be a fun and interesting way to develop these skills which can be transferred to other subjects and even applied in day-to-day life In this respect the course will make an excellent preparation for learners who want to study or work in areas that rely on these skills especially where they are applied to technical problems

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN

The course will give learners an in-depth understanding of how computer technology works Learners will no doubt be familiar with the use of computers and other related technology from their other subjects and elsewhere However the course will give them an insight into what goes on lsquobehind the scenesrsquo including computer programming which many learners find absorbing The course will develop critical thinking analysis and problem-solving skills through the study of computer programming You will learn about the technological components of a computer and how they come together to provide the computing power that we now all take for granted You will learn the basics of at least three computer programming languages and apply these to develop bespoke solutions to given problems

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will develop a range of programming skills through a structured problem-solving based teaching package The emphasis will be on supported independent discovery Developed skills will be regularly assessed through the development of mini programming projects throughout the course

This is a highly practical course with a large proportion of the teaching time being given over to the practical development and practice of programming skills Students will be encouraged to develop a portfolio of skills in a number of areas which will help them develop a major program to solve a given problem in Year 11 Independent research will be used extensively to support the development of core understanding of the more theoretical parts of the course

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Computing will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Computing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Computer systems and programming 40 1 hr 30 paper

Practical investigation 30 Controlled assessment

Programming project 30 Controlled assessment

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwocrorgukdownloadkdocr_31053_kd_gcse_2010_specpdf

For more information about studying Computing at GCSE see Mr Patel

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

DANCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoDance is a great option because although it is a structured lesson you are still able to be creative and use your own ideas I enjoy it because it keeps you active and helps to build your confidence when performing It is my favourite subject rdquo

WHY STUDY DANCE If you wish to take dance further or are considering it as a career Because the study of Dance contributes to studentsrsquo aesthetic and social development Dance supports learning across a range of subjects because it enables students to develop confidence and self-

esteem You should choose Dance if you enjoy it want to develop your skills enjoy performing and working with others You need some sense of rhythm and basic ability at least to be successful on the course as it is quite demanding

practically

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to dance safely to avoid injury to warm up and cool down in a safe environment How to be a healthy dancer Eg keeping fit hydrated having a good diet no smoking How to develop your dance vocabulary How to develop performance choreographic and appreciation skills To learn a set solo for the practical exam To perform a group dance piece To choreograph a solo and a group piece How to analyse professional dance works How to prepare for a written examination How to use movement to express yourself

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by working with others building up your dance vocabulary through practical and written work You will visit the theatre to attend live dance productions and watch other recorded dance works and analyse these You will work with professional dance companies such as SugaBrown Rambert and Phoenix dance companies

PROGRESSION GCSE Dance provides a route to further study at A level in higher education in Dance or Performing Arts as well as vocational courses professional training or community activities

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 20 Performance

Unit 2 40 Choreography

Unit 3 20 Set Solo

Unit 4 20 Written Exam

See the full GCSE specification at

httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesart_dan_dra_musnewdance_materials

For more information about studying Dance at GCSE see Mrs Manning

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

DRAMA GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoEvery lesson is completely different to the previous one The environment is supportive and everyone works as a team

You get to learn more about your class Drama is fun interesting and hard work but enjoyable During the two years my

confidence has grown considerably I have always enjoyed Drama but Drama at GCSE level has given me lots of confidence

and I feel that my skills in Drama are improving by the weekrdquo

WHY STUDY DRAMA You should opt for this course if you enjoy drama and want to work with others

you like to work imaginatively and creatively generating and communicating ideas

you want to develop a basis for your future role as an active citizen in employment and society in general

you want to actively engage in the process of study in order to develop as an effective independent learner and as a

critical and reflective thinker

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN How to use various explorative strategies to create Drama Eg tableau thought-tracking hotseating marking the

moment mime narration and cross-cutting

How to work with others co-operating in a group negotiating expressing ideas and listening

Performance skills - developing vocal and physical techniques eg vocal projection and building confidence

How to devise plays and how to act out scripted plays

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will learn by doing by being involved in practical work individually in pairs in small groups and as a class exploring

themes issues and ideas You will develop your Drama vocabulary go to see plays at the theatre analyse the work of

others evaluate your own work set yourself targets take on numerous challenges and keep a written record of your

work

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Drama will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Theatre Studies

Performing Arts or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

1 Devised workshop 30 Controlled Test

2 Scripted play 30 Controlled Test

3 Practical Exam 40 Practical Examination

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09dramaPages

For more information about studying Drama at GCSE see Mrs Manning

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

FOOD GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD WJEC

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoHome Economics is a good subject as it allows you to explore your creative side and also helps you to learn about health and nutrition The course also has a lot of practical work and you will find you are cooking at least once a week which is great There is also some theory work that is done during lessons The subject is good for organised people and helps to develop organisational skills because of the amount of cooking done The teachers are helpful kind friendly and encouraging as they want to help you to expand your practical skills Overall I feel that the subject is inspiring the teachers are understanding and the environment is welcomingrdquo

WHY STUDY HOME ECONOMICS FOOD Home Economics is a good option if you are well organised good at multi-tasking have enjoyed your Food lessons at Key Stage 3 and have an interest in learning more about Food and Nutrition and extending your practical skills You should opt for this subject if you are interested in a career as any of the following Dietician (give advice on diet and nutrition to both sick and healthy people) Chef (preparing foods in a restaurant canteen or cafeacute for the public to enjoy) Recipe Developer (for a food manufacturer) Home Economist (promoting foods or writing for a food publisher eg Meat Marketing Board Dairy Council or a magazine such as lsquoGood Foodrsquo) Further Study (this GCSE course provides a suitable basis for AAS Home Economics) or simply want to learn more about nutrition healthy eating and developing your practical skills

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Nutrition diet and health throughout life dietary guidelines and food choice nutrients terminology energy balance nutritional needs of individuals food commodities Factors affecting consumer choice current food developments packaging food labeling Nutritional physical chemical and sensory properties of food in storage preparation and cooking analysing food functions food and the senses cooking methods preservation additives menu planning developing and modifying recipes Food hygiene and safety food spoilage health safety and hygiene rrisk assessment process manufacture and storage

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In addition to theory lessons you will be given the opportunity to carry out a number of practical tasks to develop your food preparation and cooking skills You will watch relevant demonstrations videos use ICT to support your work and do both group and independent tasks Tasting and testing will be done and you will carry out a variety of practical food investigations

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Home Economics Food will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Home Economics Other possible progression from Home Economics GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) VRQ (Vocational Related Qualification) Diploma in Professional Cookery with Food and Beverage Service or BTEC Extended Diploma in Hospitality and Events Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in catering industry

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

See the full Home Economics Food specification at httpwwwwjeccouk

For more information about studying Home Economics Food at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoFrench is a very enjoyable subject to study at GCSE allowing you to learn all aspects of the language speaking it reading it listening to it or writing it Studying French will not only teach you what is needed to pass your exams but also put you in an advantaged position when applying for further education The knowledge you gain can be applied to everyday life and not just in terms of speaking the foreign language choosing this subject also means you will have better understanding of English and improved communication in general French is the language of our closest neighbours and is spoken by more than 125 million people around the world particularly in Europe Africa and Canadardquo

WHY STUDY FRENCH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Whichever language you choose the GCSE course looks at the same four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with two speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and two written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines language assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in French will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in French or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessments

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

FRENCH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying French at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukwaqaorgukqualificationstypegcsefrench indexhtml

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

GEOGRAPHY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGeography is a good subject to take because it helps you understand much more about the wider world It is interesting and enjoyable to investigate peoplersquos lives in different places but I also enjoy seeing things for myself when we do fieldworkrdquo ldquoColleges also look favourably on those having a Humanities subjectrdquo

WHY STUDY GEOGRAPHY ldquoGeographers are highly employablerdquo (The Times Careers Supplement) and are found in a variety of jobs It is a good lsquobalancing subjectrsquo that helps you develop a broad range of skills and knowledge Geography provides a useful background for many jobs eg pilot lorry driver estate agent police courier housing officer It has particularly strong links with surveying town and country planning civil engineering environmental scientist meteorology tourism and transport cartography geology and the oil industry The academic skills of a geographer are also relevant to many professions eg legal financial

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN You will learn about different landscapes and the people who live in them the way people alter their environment and the effects of such changes The topics are varied For example

What does it feel like to grow up in a shanty town in Brazil Why did 80000 die in earthquakes in Pakistan 2005 and 70000 in China 2008 How can Blackpool retain its popularity as a seaside resort What is the worst type of natural disaster How are the river and valley features at Magdale typical of other rivers Did the US government fail the people of New Orleans before during and after Hurricane Katrina Why are some houses allowed to fall into the sea in Norfolk and North Yorkshire while others are saved

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

There will be a mixture of practical and theory-based learning revolving around enquiries about a variety of people and

places Students will practice problem-solving and make decisions about real issues They will develop a variety of skills

including research using the internet and fieldwork (eg Honley Huddersfield and North Yorkshire coast)

PROGRESSION This GCSE is an ideal foundation for progression to AS or A level courses in Geography or a related subject It also develops skills and knowledge useful in a wide variety of subjects

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Physical Geography 375 90 minutes

Human Geography 375 90 minutes

Fieldwork Report (North Yorkshire Coast) 25 Controlled Assessment (June Year 10 ndash

September Year 11)

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

For more information about studying Geography at GCSE see Mr Carr

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI took Graphics because I like drawing my Year 9 teacher said I would be good at it it would help me with my Resistant Materials GCSE and my ultimate goal is to become a Design and Technology teacher I enjoy the subject because I get a lot of support from my teacher I like the techniques that I have learnt and I am learning and developing I enjoy amalgamating drawing and CAD work and developing my skills in this area I like the fact that I got a range of briefs to choose from for my coursework and then tailored them to my own interestsrdquo

WHY STUDY GRAPHICS PRODUCTS Graphics is a great option choice if you like drawing and designing anything from graffiti style logos to cartoon characters The subject provides an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made Graphics Products is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN GCSE Graphics Products is the communication of visual information through paper based products such as packaging The course is split into two parts Mini Projects and Major Projects In Year 10 pupils undertake a series of mini projects to provide them with the necessary skills to complete the final year assignment During these projects they learn or develop skills in the following areas 2D amp 3D rendering logo design and manipulation packaging design font design and computer aided design (CAD) Although emphasis is placed on the design and communication of ideas there is a requirement to model designs three dimensionally in a variety of mediums In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and prototype 3D products such as perfume packaging Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through the completion of both the mini and major projects Because of the nature of the projects pupils see the development of ideas and products from start to finish and are constantly improving their personal designing and making skills through the repetition of skills in different mediums

Students receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Graphics Products will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Graphics Products is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths graphic design packaging design architecture engineering product design automotive design interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

GRAPHICS PRODUCTS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4550-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Graphics Products at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoHistory isnrsquot just facts and figures We wouldnrsquot be the people we are today if we hadnrsquot learnt from the past I chose this subject because the topics we study are still relevant in todayrsquos world are interesting and are fascinating to learn about Also there are exciting parts of the course as I have just been on a trip to Belgium visiting WW1 sitesrdquo

WHY STUDY HISTORY You should study History if you are interested in discussing and explaining why events happen History is an extremely interesting subject and creates a lot of debate History helps explain the world we live in and the course challenges students to think for themselves Employers who see that you have a qualification in History immediately know certain things about you They know that

You are able to gather and read different types of information

You are able to form a coherent argument

You can read maps graphs and other diagrams

You are able to look carefully at information and check it for bias or propaganda

You are able to communicate clearly and have learned to express yourself verbally and on paper History teaches a wide variety of skills and therefore is open to a lot of jobs such as journalism law TV research accountancy town planning police conservation archaeology teaching and politics

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In History students will focus on Modern World History Students will study a range of topic such as the changing role of

women and the Suffragettes World War 1 the USA 1919-41 and the Cold War As part of the course students will also

complete a controlled assessment about the Vietnam War

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN

Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles essays paired working group work and class discussions ICT also plays an important part in the History curriculum and we support our learners through subscription to History websites which make learning more interactive and exciting On top of this we also arrange events and trips for our students For example we currently run annual trips to the Theatre and we also organise a three day trip to the Battlefield sites of World War One in Belgium and France

PROGRESSION

A GCSE in History will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in History or a

related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

War amp Transformation of British society c1903-1928 25 Written Paper

USA 1919-1941 25 Written Paper

Vietnam 25 Controlled assessment

International Relations 1929-1969 25 Written Paper

HISTORY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcomqualsgcsegcse09ghistoryaPagesdefaultaspx

For more information about studying History at GCSE see Mr Pulsford

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoI have always wanted to study a GCSE ICT course which allows me to learn about and use the latest digital technologies I know that ICT is an important qualification and will help me regardless of what I decide to do I want to get ahead of the game so GCSE ICT here I come rdquo

WHY STUDY ICT The course provides excellent preparation for higher study and employment in the field of Information Technology The increasing importance of information technologies means there will be a growing demand for professionals who are qualified in this area Learners whorsquove taken a GCSE in ICT and who then progress to study the subject at A Level or university will have an advantage over their colleagues who are picking up the subject at these levels Career paths include Web Designer Multimedia Designer IT Support Engineer Games designer and many more Alternatively learners who have studied GCSE ICT can then choose to study Computing at A Level or Degree Level Regardless of whether learners decide to study ICT at further or higher education the GCSE qualification will be a fun and interesting way to acquire professional skills which can be transferred to other subjectscareers and applied in day-to-day life

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN This GCSE ICT qualification is about exploring ICT in todayrsquos world The course will give learners the opportunity to cover the latest in digital technology and rest assured the specification that we have chosen to teach at Honley is up to date and relevant in todayrsquos digital world Learners will have the chance to explore how digital technology impacts on the lives of individuals organisations and society Students learn about current and emerging digital technologies and the issues raised by their use in a range of contexts This qualification also allows learners to broaden and enhance their ICT and multimedia skills They work with a range of up to date digital tools and techniques to produce effective ICT solutions in a range of contexts The course will develop critical and logical thinking skills and allow learners to be creative

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN There are two distinct parts to the GCSE ICT course One part of the course focuses on theoretical aspects of ICT which will require leaners to be familiar with the latest digital technologies The course will look at how these digital technologies operate and the way in which they impact todayrsquos world The second part of the course is highly practical and involves learners using a wide range of digital tools to solve ICT problems Students will have the chance to learn how to use software used in industry on a professional level

PROGRESSION A GCSE in ICT will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in ICTComputing or a related subject

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Unit 1 Systems and Applications in ICT 40 1 hr 30 paper

Unit 2 The Assignment Applying ICT 30 Controlled Assessment

Unit 3 Practical Problem Solving in ICT

30 Controlled Assessment

ICT GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying ICT at GCSE see the course teachers Mr Patel or Mr Rehman

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesictict-overviewphp

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY

ldquoMedia Studies has changed the way I view the world It has taught me to be inquisitive and analytical about the world around me and not to take things at face value I have learned to question everything ndash especially lsquothe truthrsquordquo

WHY STUDY MEDIA STUDIES In addition to helping students acquire subject knowledge this specification develops critical thinking and decision-making skills develops appreciation and critical understanding of the role of the media in daily life combines practical and theoretical knowledge and skills through opportunities for personal engagement amp creativity encourages an understanding of how to use key media concepts to analyse media products amp their various contexts Media Studies is a very important subject ultimately combining aspects of Politics Sociology History and Economics It encourages creativity teaches analytical skills and introduces students to critical ways of thinking about the world around them These talents are highly valued by schools and universities

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN In Media Studies you will learn about the four key concepts which form the basis of the subject content media language forms and conventions institutions audience and representation This knowledge will be applied to a range of media texts ndash magazines and newspapers films and advertising Students are grounded with a sound theoretical base before embarking on their coursework which combines academic rigour with creativity and manufacture

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN In Year 10 work is classroom based and throughout the course the emphasis is on analysing and creating media products Honley High School has a successful partnership with the National Museum of Media in Bradford and in Year 11 our students undertake fieldwork in Bradford and work closely with the museum to create an advertising campaign for a specific target audience

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Media Studies will provide you with an ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Media Studies Film Studies and Photography A Media Studies GCSE prepares students for study in a range of disciplines at National Qualifications Framework Level 3 and above

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Unit One ndash Introducing the Media Spring Year Ten

10 Analyse the cover pages of two popular magazines or the front pages of two popular newspapers How do the coverspages appeal to their audiences 15 marks

Unit Two ndash Cross Media Production Summer Year Ten

20 Compare the impact and effectiveness of two promotional methods used by one film ndash poster cinema television or viral trailer web page 30 marks

Unit Three ndash Production Autumn Year Eleven

30 An advertising campaign for the National Museum of Media realised as one 30-second television one 30-second radio advertisement and one full page magazine advertisements 45 marks

Unit Four ndash Terminal Examination Spring Year Eleven

40 Investigating the Media Written Paper - 1 hour 30 mins - 60 marks - 40 External Assessment - Based on a pre-released topic with guidance and stimulus Task 1 Knowledge and Understanding Task 2 Research Planning and Presentation Production and Evaluation

MEDIA STUDIES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at wwwaqaorgukqualificationsgcseenglish-and-mediamedia-studies

For more information about studying Media Studies at GCSE see Mr Train

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI have really enjoyed the start to the GCSE course The practical and theory elements are pretty equally matched and the general ability of the class is high The lessons are more of a challenge and I feel I am being pushed to the best of my ability It is also a lot easier to work because of the smaller class size I am really enjoying this course and am glad I chose it as a subject The music GCSE course is fun and exciting It does not matter what musical instrument you play as you could just sing if you wanted The hardest part is the composition piecerdquo

WHY STUDY MUSIC Music GCSE is ideal if you are confident on an instrument or voice and are open minded about different types of music You will develop in confidence and get to work alongside similarly talented pupils and experience workshops with visiting musicians Having lessons on an instrument or voice helps but is not essential being an active musician is very important You should not opt for this subject if you think it is an easy option It isnrsquot There is a need for pupils to develop as composers and performers and pupils must feel comfortable using keyboardpiano or guitar to help them compose

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN There are three strands to GCSE Music Popular Music World Music and Classical Music There are five areas of study in GCSE Music Structure and Form Timbre and Dynamics Rhythm and Metre Harmony

and Tonality and Texture and Melody Listening (20)-A CD based test of 1 hour Composing (40)-2 compositions over the 2 years (and appraising of one of them) Composition Work is undertaken under controlled test conditions Composition 1 (Year 10) has a maximum of 25 hours devoted to it and this takes place in lessons Composition 2 (Year 11) has a maximum of 20 hours- undertaken in class

This means that although pupils can prepare at home composition work HAS to be done at school in lessons and cannot be done at home between lessons

Performing (40)-perform 2 pieces on any instrument or voice (solo piece and group piece)

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Most lessons are practical and because group sizes are small you have very good access to equipment and space The first term of Year 10 is spent in small groups developing confidence in performing and composing Pupils start their own compositions in the New Year Most weeks include a listening lesson but work is generally linked to composing or performing projects

PROGRESSION The course is great fun and presents a different style of learning to some more academic subjects You will also be encouraged to take part in musical groups and performances to stretch your ability

We have very good results and pupils are pushed to develop musically

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening 20 Exam

Composing (Y10) 20 Controlled Time

Composing amp Appraising (Y11) 20 Controlled Time

Performance 40 Exam

MUSIC GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4270-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Music at GCSE see Mr Baker or Mr Richardson

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

PHYSICAL EDUCATION (PE) GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD EDEXCEL

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took GCSE PE for many reasons I believe that itrsquos a fun and exciting course but very unique There are a lot of choices in activities you can do and a lot of variation to fit your suitable strengths in PE Itrsquos very healthy and good for your fitness and gives you a chance to get out of a classroom and do something different Also you get to understand how your body works and functions which I found very interesting and usefulrdquo WHY STUDY PE You have a keen interest in sport and recreation and always look forward to your PE lessons You take part in sportrecreation outside of class time You want to follow a course that develops knowledge and understanding through practical involvement You want to know more about the benefits of sport and exercise You want to improve your own performance in a range of sports roles You want to study a course that is active and that you will enjoy You are considering a sports-related career or an A Levelhigher education course

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Develop your knowledge and practical skills in a range of physical activities Examine the effects of exercise and how training can improve performance Find ways to improve your own performances in a variety of roles Identify ways to develop and maintain a healthy and active lifestyle through participation in physical activity Appreciate the benefits of promoting ldquosport for allrdquo

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN The course builds on the knowledge understanding skills established in Key Stage 3 Physical Education It will give you exciting opportunities to be involved in a number of different physical activities promoting an active and healthy lifestyle You can perform in one or all of the following roles playerparticipant leader of official You should have an interest in PE and sport enjoy being active and appreciate the benefits of keeping fit and healthy

PROGRESSION As well as being the ideal preparation for the A Level Physical Education course GCSE PE allows for progression to related vocational qualifications such as BTEC Firsts and Nationals in Sport or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course develops the transferable skills and key skills that employers are looking for and can lead to a wide variety of employment opportunities This can include training in such areas as recreational management leisure activities coaching officiating the fitness industry the armed forces and the Civil Service

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit 1 ndash Examination 40 Unit 2 ndash Controlled Assessment 60

Unit 1 is externally assessed

through a written examination

paper of 1 hour and 30 minutes

This will contribute a maximum

of 40 towards your total marks

Unit 2 is assessed in two sections

Section 1 ndash four practical performances in the role of either playerparticipant

leader or official You can achieve 48 of the marks from your four

performances two of which may be in the role of a leader or official

Section 2 ndash analysis of performance in one of the chosen activities This will be

worth 12 of the marks and should include planning performing and

evaluating a Personal Exercise Programme

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwedexcelcom

For more information about studying PE at GCSE see Mr OrsquoConnor

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI took Resistant Materials at GCSE because I really enjoyed it at Key Stage 3 and I like to design and make things I have found from doing the course at Key Stage 4 that I enjoy it even more than before now we are doing more advanced projects I want to become a designer for a job career and intend on doing product design at A ndash level Resistant Materials is my favourite GCSE I have taken it is practical fun and you learn lots of different useful life skillsrdquo

WHY STUDY RESISTANT MATERIALS Resistant materials is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Resistant Materials is ideal if you have an interest in designing and making things an inquiring mind or just want to learn something new

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn a wide range of skills including shaping forming and manufacturing techniques through design and make assignments in wood metal and plastic They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Projects undertaken in Year 10 are as follows

Picture frame design and make Manufacture of a copper storage container Timber bending and shaping Planning and manufacture of a marking gauge Manufacture of a bird box

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Resistant Materials will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses or an Art foundation course Career choices Resistant Materials is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths joiner carpenter electrician plumber motor vehicle maintenance engineering product design automotive design and interior design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

RESISTANT MATERIALS GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpstoreaqaorgukqualnewgcsepdfAQA-4560-W-SPPDF

For more information about studying Resistant Materials at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI like learning about culture and familiesrdquo ldquoI like the topic of media and the trip to the media museumrdquo ldquoI enjoy the group work debates and postersldquo ldquoI like finding out other peoplersquos viewsrdquo ldquoIrsquom looking forward to studying crime and powerrdquo

WHY STUDY SOCIOLOGY Sociology provides a valuable foundation for many jobs including a police officer therapist social worker counsellor researcher journalist nurse teacher and jobs related to working with children and people from all different backgrounds

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Sociology is the study of people and how they behave in society Students will carry out surveys such as

questionnaires and interviews and then interpret the data gathered Sociology explores how the media such as television impacts on a personrsquos self-image and behaviour and bias in the

news It looks at how far education can transform a personrsquos life chances Sociology considers the differences in peoplersquos backgrounds their gender cultural background and their families It

also explains society within its historical context It investigates crime in all areas of society from street crime to crime in big businesses It looks at the unequal nature

of power and wealth in the hands of the few to the relative poverty of many The views of theorists such as Karl Marx are applied to the topics

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will carry out surveys such as questionnaires and interviews and interpret the data gathered Students will be encouraged as independent learners when they develop their skills for exam essays With all topics group activities debates and discussions and group presentations to the class will develop the studentrsquos self-confidence and skills Students will also be taught about how to interpret and understand statistics

PROGRESSION Sociology GCSE will make an excellent foundation for Arsquo level Sociology and vocational subjects It has many links with Psychology Media Studies History Economics and Law

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Two external exams ndashboth at the end of Year 11

SOCIOLOGY GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwwwaqaorgukqualnewgcsesoc_scinewsoc_materials

For more information about studying Sociology at GCSE see Ms Raw

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoSpanish is the third most widely spoken global language after Chinese and English with more than 500 million speakersrdquo ldquoLearning Spanish is fun You learn to speak the language as well as learning about traditions and culture in Spainrdquo ldquoPeople with language skills have better job prospectsrdquo You should opt for a language ifhellip ldquoYou have an inquisitive mind are keen to improve your skills base confidence and your understanding of not only a new language but of different cultures Learning another language improves listening and reading skills increases your ability to solve problems think creatively and improves your knowledge of English words It also helps to develop your mind as you work a part of your brain that would otherwise be un-used Language learning builds up your brain like exercising builds up your musclesrdquo

WHY STUDY SPANISH A Modern Foreign Language is a good option Employability - Basic ability in languages is much in demand as employers seek those capable of communicating with foreign customers or breaking the ice with a few phrases at visits or in a meeting Students who opt to study languages are at a distinct advantage in the job market in many sectors Industries which require foreign language speakers include business services central government contact centres engineering financial services marketing media technology travel and tourism the voluntary and charitable sector

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN The GCSE course looks at four themes Lifestyle (health and relationships) Leisure (free time and the media) Home and Environment (home and local area environmental issues) and Work and Education (school and future plans current and future jobs) The skills of listening (20 of the final grade) and reading (20 of the final grade) are examined at the end of Year 11 at either Foundation (C-G) or Higher (A-D) level with 2 speaking assessments (30 of the final grade) taken during Year 10 and Year 11 and 2 written controlled assessments (two essays of up to 600 words across the two tasks - 30) undertaken throughout Years 10 and 11

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students use a huge range of resources in their learning of a language from the Internet to songs radio clips to magazines Language Assistants to grammatical mind maps PowerPoint presentations to the text book They work independently in pairs and in groups and are actively involved in learning how to learn a language as well as in preparation for the exams

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Spanish will provide you with the ideal foundation for progression to AS and A level courses in Spanish or another language

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT

Unit Type

Listening paper 20 50 minute paper

Reading Paper 20 50 minute paper

2 Speaking Assessments

2 Writing Assessment s

30

30

4-6 minutes each

300 words each

SPANISH GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

For more information about studying Spanish at GCSE see Ms Davis

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorguk

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoBasic electronics and what components do and how they work and mechanisms like gears pulleys cams and cranks and how circuits link to mechanismsrdquo ldquoItrsquos a good option if you like practical stuff and want to learn how stuff works You make models and circuits and itrsquos not just theory but we do learn the theory as wellrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Systems and Control is a fantastic option choice for almost everyone it offers an insight into how the things around us have been designed and made provides practical skills and knowledge and it gives pupils life skills Systems and control is ideal if you are that person who took apart their toys and asked the question lsquohow does it work and how can I get it back togetherrsquo

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN During the course pupils will learn the theory of how electronic components work and are controlled through a series of mini projects The course will cover the programming of microchips basic robotic control with Lego Mindstorm and the different types of motion and how they can be linked to create complex mechanisms They will experience all stages of the design process in preparation for the final assignment which can contribute up to 60 of the final grade

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn and gain experience through practical activities and design orientated tasks In Year 10 students work on a range of projects that provide them with a solid understanding of the subject to successfully undertake the final year project Some of the areas covered are shown below

Making working Circuits through Software Simulation Making the PCB and soldering all the components needed Software simulation of mechanisms constructing mechanisms Interfacing electronics with mechanisms

Pupils receive Computer Aided Design (CAD) and computer aided manufacture (CAM) inputs to ensure good awareness of industrial practices In Year 11 students select a major project and complete a portfolio of design work and produce a manufactured product Students can choose a brief set by the teacher or create their own to reflect an interest or hobby

PROGRESSION A GCSE in Systems and Control will provide you with the ideal foundation for AS and A level design courses Career choices - Systems amp Control is a fantastic option if you are considering any of the following career paths electronics architecture engineering product design and automotive design

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Pupils are assessed internally and externally in the final year of the course Pupils sit an end of year examination which is worth 40 of their overall grade and is assessed externally Pupils produce a design portfolio and a product which individually are worth 50 these two elements are then combined to contribute up to 60 of the final grade and are assessed internally The internally assessed elements are carried out under controlled assessment conditions which is essentially where pupils work in exam conditions following teacher inputs Students receive verbal and written feedback based on the GCSE A to G grade boundaries However in Year 10 these do not count towards the overall grade but provide an indication of future attainment

SYSTEMS AND CONTROL GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full GCSE specification at httpwebaqaorgukqualnewgcsesdandtsystems_indexphpid=07ampprev=07

For more information about studying Systems and Control at GCSE see Mr Myers

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoGCSE Textiles is good because you do a lot of practical and design work In Year 10 you go on a trip based on the work yoursquore doing and itrsquos a very good start to the course If you enjoy fashion and design then this is a very good course to takerdquo

WHY STUDY TEXTILES This is a great choice if you are creative artistic and have an interest in fashion andor interior designing also if you are interested in taking creative subjects beyond GCSE level You should opt for this subject if you would be interested in taking the following career paths fashionclothing design interior design pattern making fashion drawing marketing buying and merchandiser for textile products from fabrics to fashion clothing fashion and product photography fabric designer weave knit and print automotive design textile technologist developing new products production engineering working developing new machinery within the textile industry or colourist and fabric printer

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Research Methods Designing Techniques fashion drawing and presentation techniques Fibres and Fabrics Properties and characteristics and combination construction and uses of textiles fibres and fabrics Finishing Processes dying and printing decoration and enhancement and fabric finishes to improve their properties Components used on Fabrics and how they are produced Product Analysis analysis of designs and products image lifestyle co-ordination ambience and harmony reflected in

past and present textile designs and analysis of own designs and products Evaluation Techniques Social Cultural and Moral issues Health and safety Techniques and Processes using commercial patterns and making their own to produce textile products using tools

equipment and machines accurately processes used for one-offs batch and mass production and selecting appropriate processes for own products

Systems and Control ICT CADCAM in industry and usage of CADCAM in designing and making of own products Industrial processes

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN You will be given a range of interesting projects to complete covering fashion design to technical textiles products Within these projects you cover both designing and making skills You will be given the opportunity to improve on your creative and practical skills from Key Stage 3 and will make a range of textile products in Year 10 Examples of activities are A visit to see Vivienne Westwoodrsquos exhibition on her fashion designs in Sheffield This was linked to a fashion recycling project at the beginning of Year 10 vvisiting the local Textile Centre of Excellence to see industrial processes and designers at work fashion and textile competitions held within and outside school using software that is used within the fashion and textile industries vvisits to final exhibitions of pupils work at AS and A2 levels in both art and textiles and links with local further education establishments

PROGRESSION Possible progression from Textiles GCSE (with additional GCSErsquos) A levels in Textiles or Art amp Design (general or Fashion amp Textile Pathway) or BTEC Diploma L2 Extended Diploma L3 in Art amp Design Students could also consider Advanced or Foundation Apprenticeships in textiles

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT On-going assessment combined with terminal assessment

TEXTILES GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD AQA

See the full Home Economics Textiles specification at httpwwwaqaorguk

For more information about studying Home Economics Textiles at GCSE see Mrs Pinder

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

WHAT THE STUDENTS SAY ldquoI chose Triple Science because itrsquos what I need for my future studies I enjoy Science and this allows me to learn more about the stuff Irsquom really interested inrdquo ldquoWhen I first chose the subject I thought it would be really hard but Irsquove found it is very similar to what the other students do except we will do one extra module Also before picking my options I found out that the local colleges prefer people who have done Triple Science This made my choice a little easierrdquo

WHY STUDY SYSTEMS AND CONTROL Local colleges prefer Triple Science to the Dual Science Option due to greater depth of understanding that students develop during the course The key skills developed in the subject are entirely transferrable and therefore viewed very favourably by many colleges and universities As a core subject Science is viewed as essential by many employers and the government Schools minister Nick Gibb has stated that educating the next generation of scientists is crucial if we are to compete with the best in the worldrdquo Clearly students with good sciences have an advantage going forward

WHAT WILL YOU LEARN Triple Science splits the sciences of Biology Chemistry and Physics into individual subjects so it is worth three GCSEs Students studying this course will Gain a broad and deep understanding of many interesting scientific concepts Be very well prepared for further study at A-level Have the time to explore practical science at a more advanced level Develop many key skills including team work independent enquiry effective participation and creative thinking Year 10 learning will mainly be about the core elements of science based around how science works these are key theories and skills Year 11 builds on the previous year and will focus on developing knowledge and understanding

HOW STUDENTS WILL LEARN Students will learn through a variety of teaching styles practical based work paired activities group work class discussions and individual tasks Questioning is fundamental to learning and it is crucial that students become active learners by asking lots of questions Practical work is very important and the coursework element of each subject will require the student to carry out practical work and then explain the science behind the results Students will have access to key websites and online resources that we have purchased especially for this course on top of the usual resources that are used Clearly as more products become available we will try to ensure that we have the most effective resources at our disposal

PROGRESSION Triple science is really important for students wishing to study A-Level sciences or related subjects As a core subject it is required for a large number of courses and careers it is crucial that students carefully research their own requirements based on their choices

METHOD OF ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to sit examinations in all three Science subjects at the end of their two year study programme 75 of each GCSE grade will come from the terminal exams the final 25 will come from controlled assessments that will be completed throughout Key Stage 4 Students will be regularly assessed during the two years this information will be used to inform progress and tier entry

TRIPLE SCIENCE GCSE OPTION

EXAM BOARD OCR

Either refer to the Science department for more information or find out more specific information from wwwocrorguk Please note that the Triple Science course is part of the OCR Twenty First Century Science Suite

For more information about studying Science at GCSE see Mr Maniyar

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

Options Choices Form

(overleaf)

Please complete and return to Student Services by Thursday 14th February

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature

HONLEY HIGH SCHOOL OPTIONS CHOICES FORM 2013

Name Form

All students will follow courses in English Mathematics Science RE PE and PSHCE Below you need to select the extra optional subjects you wish to take by filling in sections 1 to 3 below

1 GCSE Options You must select four subjects and two reserves Number you main choices 1234 (in order of preference) and your reserve choices R1 and R2

Art and Design Business Studies Child Development

Computing Dance Drama

Food French Geography

Graphic Products History ICT

Media Studies Music PE

Resistant Materials Sociology Spanish

Systems amp Control Textiles Triple Science

2 Additional Qualifications If you wish to be considered for any of the following courses please tick the appropriate box Please note that

these courses are in addition to the four GCSE choices above

the list below is provisional as at the time of printing we have not had confirmation of which courses will be available from September 2013

these courses will take place at other schools colleges and students are expected to travel to and from the course independently

places on these courses are strictly limited and will require some form of application process to be selected for a place

Photography GCSE

Hairdressing amp Beauty NVQ

Animal Care BTEC

Engineering NVQ

Catering NVQ BTEC Construction BTEC

3 Parental approval Please sign to show that you agree with these options choices and have discussed them with your son daughter Parent Carerrsquos Signature